Sebring (2010) - Car Chrysler - Free user manual and instructions

Brand	Chrysler
Model	Sebring (2010)
Vehicle Type	Passenger Car (Sedan or Convertible)
Engine Options	2.4L I4 (173 hp) or 3.5L V6 (235 hp)
Transmission	4-speed automatic (4-cyl) or 6-speed automatic (V6)
Drivetrain	Front-wheel drive
Fuel Type	Gasoline (regular unleaded recommended)
Fuel Tank Capacity	16.9 gallons (64 liters)
Seating Capacity	5 passengers
Dimensions (L x W x H)	190.6 x 70.2 x 56.4 inches (sedan)
Wheelbase	108.9 inches
Curb Weight	Approximately 3,300 lbs (1,497 kg)
Safety Features	ABS, front/side/curtain airbags, traction control
Maintenance Intervals	Oil change every 5,000 miles; tire rotation every 7,500 miles
Battery	12V, Group Size 58 (standard)
Tire Size	P205/65R16 (base) or P215/60R17 (upgrade)
Spare Tire	Compact temporary spare (T125/80R16)
Key Features	AM/FM/CD stereo, available Bluetooth, cruise control, power windows
Cleaning Recommendations	Use mild soap and water for exterior; vacuum and wipe interior
Parts & Repairability	Common parts available via Mopar; repair manuals online

Frequently Asked Questions - Sebring (2010) Chrysler

How do I reset the oil change light on a 2010 Chrysler Sebring?

Turn the ignition to ON (not start). Press the TRIP button until the odometer shows OIL CHANGE. Press and hold TRIP for 5 seconds until the light resets.

What type of oil does the 2010 Chrysler Sebring require?

The recommended oil is 5W-30 for the 2.4L engine and 10W-30 for the 3.5L V6. Use API certified oil.
Capacity with filter: 4.5 quarts (2.4L) or 5.5 quarts (3.5L).

How to pair a Bluetooth phone with my Sebring?

Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on your phone. On the radio, press PHONE or MENU. Select DEVICE > ADD DEVICE. The system will search; select ‘Chrysler’ on your phone and enter PIN 0000 when prompted.

What does the check engine light mean?

The check engine light indicates a fault in the engine or emissions system. Common causes include a loose gas cap, faulty oxygen sensor, or spark plug issues. Have the code read by a mechanic or using an OBD-II scanner.

How do I replace a headlight bulb on the Sebring?

Open the hood. Locate the headlight assembly behind the headlight. Remove the rubber cover, unplug the wiring, and release the spring clip. Replace with a H11 bulb for low beam (or 9005 for high beam). Reassemble.

What is the towing capacity of a 2010 Chrysler Sebring?

The Sebring is not designed for heavy towing. Maximum trailer weight is 1,000 lbs with a properly equipped vehicle. Always check owner's manual for specifics.

How do I program a key fob remote?

Insert the key into the ignition and turn to ON. Press and hold the LOCK button on the fob for 5 seconds. Turn ignition off and test the remote. If unsuccessful, repeat or consult a dealer.

What is the proper tire pressure for my Sebring?

Recommended tire pressure is 32 psi (front and rear) for normal driving. Check the sticker on the driver's door jamb for exact specifications.

How often should I change the transmission fluid?

For the 4-speed automatic, change fluid every 60,000 miles. For the 6-speed, every 100,000 miles. Use only ATF+4 fluid.

My car won't start - what should I check?

First, ensure the battery is connected and not dead. Check the starter fuse (#41 in the IPM). If you hear a clicking sound, the battery may be weak. Try jump-starting.
If it still won't start, the starter or ignition switch may be faulty.

USER MANUAL Sebring (2010) Chrysler

Stylized car emblem with wing-like design and central emblem (no text or symbols)

Sebring

Convertible

2 0 1 0

OWNER'SMANUAL

SECTIONPAGE

TABLEOFCONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION 3 1
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE 833
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1534
5 STARTINGANDOPERATING 2435
6 WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES 3296
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
8 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES 4078
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE 4259
10 INDEX 43510

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■Introduction....4
■How To Use This Manual.... 4
■Warnings And Cautions....6

■Vehicle Identification Number 6
■Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....7

[Non-Text]

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of falls safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOWTOUSETHISMANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

6INTRODUCTION

WARNINGSANDCAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLEIDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a black arrow pointing to a small component, no text or symbols present.

VehicleIdentificationNumber

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLEMODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoanaccidentresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A Word About Your Keys....12

□Ignition Key Removal.... 1 2

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder 14

■Sentry Key ^® 14

□Replacement Keys 16

□Customer Key Programming.... 16

□General Information 17

■ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ..... 18

□Rearming The System....18

□To Arm The System 18

□To Disarm The System 19

■Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ..... 2 0

■ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 21

□To Unlock The Doors....21

□To Lock The Doors....24

□Convertible Top Operation Button — If Equipped 25

□To Unlatch The Trunk 25

□Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 2 6

□Battery Replacement.... 26

□General Information.... 27

■Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . 2 7

□How To Use Remote Start....27

■Door Locks 29

□Manual Door Locks 29

□Power Door Locks 30

■Windows.... 3 2

□Power Windows.... 3 2

□Wind Buffeting 35

■Trunk Lock And Release.... 3 5

■Trunk Safety Warning 37

□Trunk Internal Emergency Release.... 37

■ Occupant Restraints 37

□Lap/Shoulder Belts 39

□Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 44

□Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If Equipped .... 4 4

□Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . 4 5

□ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) .. 46

□Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) 50

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE11

□BeltAlert®Programming.... 50
□Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . 5 1
□Seat Belt Extender 51
□Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags 52
□Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 58
□Event Data Recorder (EDR) 64
□Child Restraints 6 6

■Engine Break-In Recommendations....77

■Safety Tips....78

□Transporting Passengers....78

□Exhaust Gas 78

□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle.... 7 9

☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle.... 8 1

The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place.

You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with either side up.

Close-up of a black key with a control panel and six key icons (no text or symbols visible)

020210512

VehicleKey

IgnitionKeyRemoval

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key slightly inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.

IgnitionSwitchPositions

- If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever into PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

- For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

- For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving childreninavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Don'tleavethekeysinthe ignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked carisan invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lockalldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-IgnitionReminder

Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition, sounds a chime signal to remind you to remove the key.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.

SENTRYKEY®

The Sentry Key®Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine.

NOTE:A key, which has not been programmed, is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning the ignition switch ON, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

AlwaysremovetheSentryKey® fromthevehicleand lockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.

NOTE: The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

16 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

ReplacementKeys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Systems serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

CustomerKeyProgramming

You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys® by performing the following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key®Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.

The new Sentry Key®is programmed. TheRemote KeylessEntry(RKE)transmitterwillalsobeprogrammedduringthisprocedure.

Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key ^® , contact your authorized dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE17

dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.

GeneralInformation

The Sentry Key ^® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLESECURITYALARM—IFEQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.

If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes, the horn will sound intermittently and the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.

RearmingTheSystem

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.

ToArmTheSystem

1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch (one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be open or closed), and close all doors.
   NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE19

NOTE:

• During the 16 second arming period, if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned ON, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on the instrument panel, and the HomeLink®/Garage Door Opener (if equipped).

ToDisarmTheSystem

Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key® into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the alarm will sound.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

TamperAlert

If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have timed out, the park and taillights flash three times (instead of the normal twice), and the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.

ILLUMINATEDENTRY—IFEQUIPPED

The courtesy/reading lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open either door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON.

NOTE: The illuminated entry system will not operate the interior lights if the dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward position).

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE21

REMOTEKEYLESSENTRY(RKE)

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, open the convertible top (if equipped), lower both door and rear quarter windows (if equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:

• The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the RKE transmitter.
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter.

Close-up of a black key with eight function keys (no text or symbols visible)

020210512

RKETransmitterwithIntegratedKey

ToUnlocktheDoors

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will also turn on.

22 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

RemoteKeyUnlock, DriverDoor/AllDoorsFirst Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:

• Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.

• Release both buttons at the same time.

• Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
• Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

FlashLightswithLock

The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:

• Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.

• Release both buttons at the same time.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 23

1. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
2. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

IlluminatedApproach—IfEquipped

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ToLocktheDoors

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.

SoundHornwithLock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:
• Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
• Release both buttons at the same time.
• Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
• Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

ConvertibleTopOperationButton—IfEquipped

Refer to "Convertible Top Operation" under "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

ToUnlatchtheTrunk

Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk.

RemoteOpenWindowFeature—IfEquipped

This feature allows you to remotely lower both door and rear quarter windows at the same time. Lowering the windows using the RKE is a two step operation:

1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once.

2. Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the button until the windows lower completely or the windows drop to the desired level, then release the button.

UsingthePanicAlarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the system.

ProgrammingAdditionalTransmitters

Refer to Sentry Key®"Customer Key Programming."

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

BatteryReplacement

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

• With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

3D illustration of a pushpin with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

021432709

BatteryService

1. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
2. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of battery is five years.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE27

1. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTESTARTINGSYSTEM—IFEQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of lately 66 ft (20 m).

NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

HowToUseRemoteStart

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed

• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
  • RKE PANIC button not pressed

WARNING!

- Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.CarbonMonoxideispoisonousandcancauseserious injuryordeathwheninhaled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- KeepRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)transmitters awayfromchildren.OperationoftheRemoteStart System,windows,doorlocksorothercontrols couldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

ToEnterRemoteStartMode

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the bill start and the vehicle will remain in the start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,

the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

ToExitRemoteStartModewithoutDrivingthe Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one-time press of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.

ToExitRemoteStartModeandDrivetheVehicle

Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped).

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE29

DOORLOCKS

ManualDoorLocks

To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

ManualLockPlunger

If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• Forpersonalsecurityandsafetyintheeventofan accident,lockthevehicledoorsasyoudriveas wellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fromtheignitionlock,andlockyourvehicle. Unsuperviseduseofvehicleequipmentmaycause severepersonalinjuriesanddeath.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving childreninavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Don'tleavethekeysin theignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

PowerDoorLocks

A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door trim panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and rotary knob (no text or symbols visible)

PowerDoorLockSwitch

AutoDoorLocks

When enabled, your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for programming.

AutoUnlockonExit

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

AutoUnlockDooronExitProgramming

The Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
• Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
• Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position.

1. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors.
2. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.

NOTE: This feature will not be functional until the vehicle has been driven and the shift lever returned to the PARK position.

1. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit feature in accordance with local laws.

WINDOWS

PowerWindows

The window controls on the driver's door trim panel operate the door windows and the rear quarter windows.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the left side of the control panel (no text or symbols visible)

AUTOPowerWindowSwitches

There is a single window control on the passenger's door trim panel, which operates the passenger door window. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, and when the accessory delay feature is active.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE33

NOTE:

- If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts while driving with the windows down, safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildreninvehicle, with the keys in theignitionswitch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

SmartGlassFeature

The door window will lower slightly if the window is fully up when opening the door. The window will return to its full up position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and top seal damage.

AutoWindowDown—IfEquipped

The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch.

For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature.

For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ResetWindowSmartGlassFeaturefor Opening/ClosingtheDoor

If the vehicle battery goes dead, the window Smart Glass Feature for opening and closing the door will be disabled.

To reactivate the window Smart Glass Feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored.

1. Lowering all four windows to the full open position.
2. Press and hold the Power Top Switch in the Close direction. Once the Power Top becomes fully closed, all four windows will start closing.
3. Continue to hold the Power Top Switch an additional two seconds after the windows are fully closed.
4. Push all the window switches down firmly to open the windows completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

WindowLockoutSwitch

The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the passenger door. To disable the window control on the passenger door, press and release the window LOCK

button (setting it in the down position). To enable the window control, press and release the window LOCK button again (setting it in the up position).

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

WindowLockoutSwitch

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

35

WindBuffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with one window down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open both windows together to minimize the buffeting.

TRUNKLOCKANDRELEASE

To unlatch the trunk lid from inside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK RELEASE Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

NOTE: The convertible top must be either closed and latched or open and latched to release the trunk.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Circular object with a white emblem on its surface, resembling a camera lens or button (no text or symbols visible)

TrunkRelease Button

The trunk release button on the dash will be disabled if the vehicle is locked by pressing the power door lock switch or by pressing the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The trunk release button will be enabled when the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE or if the key is inserted into the ignition and turned to ON or START.

NOTE: This provides a locked area in the vehicle even if the convertible top is open.

To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK RELEASE button on the RKE transmitter two times.

With the ignition ON, the word "deck" will display in the odometer indicating the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is pressed.

With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out, the word "deck" will display until the trunk is closed.

On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the words "Trunk Ajar" will display.

TRUNKSAFETYWARNING

WARNING!

Donotallowchildrentohaveaccesstothetrunk, eitherbyclimbingintothetrunkfromoutside,or throughtheinsideofthevehicle.Alwaysclosethe trunklidwhenyourvehicleisunattended.Oncein thetrunk,youngchildrenmaynotbeabletoescape, eveniftheyenteredthroughtherearseat.Iftrapped inthetrunk,childrencandiefromsuffocationor heatstroke.

TrunkInternalEmergencyRelease

As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE37

Interior view of a car showing engine compartment with wiring and a close-up inset of the lock mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

TrunkInternalEmergencyRelease

OCCUPANTRESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. The following safety features are standard on your vehicle:

- Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions

• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint)
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if equipped
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event — if equipped
• All seat belt systems (except the driver's) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt

all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. Refer to "LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren).

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers assafe as possible.

WARNING!

Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strik the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE39

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebeltedatalltimes.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Wearingaseatbeltincorrectlyisdangerous.Seat beltsaredesignedtogoaroundthelargebonesof yourbody.Thesearethestrongestpartsofyour bodyandcantaketheforcesofacollisionthebest.
• Wearingyourbeltinthewrongplacecouldmake yourinjuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout ofpartofthebelt.Followtheseinstructionsto wearyourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengerssafe,too.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat.

(Continued)

1. The seat belt latch plate is on the outboard side of the front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Interior view of a car showing the seat, rear seats, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

PullingOuttheLatchPlate

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE41

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

InsertingLatchPlateintoBuckle

• Abelthatisbuckledintothewrongbucklewill notprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncouldride toohighonyourbody,possiblycausinginternal injuries. Alwaysbuckleyourbeltintothebuckle nearestyou.
• Abelthatistooloosewillnotprotectyou properly.Inasuddenstop,youcouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnugly.
• Abelthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous. Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesofthe vehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Abeltwornunderthearmcancauseinternal injuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongassshoulderbones. Wearthebeltoveryourshouldersothatyourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceinacollision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

(Continued)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE43

1. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, lift up on the shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

PositioningtheLapBelt

WARNING!

- Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof internalinjuryinacollision.Thebeltforceswon'tbe atthestronghipandpelvicbones,butacrossyour abdomen.Alwayswearthelapbeltaslowaspossibleandkeepitsnug.

- Atwistedbeltcan'tdoitsjobproperly.Ina collision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethebelt isstraight.Ifyoucan'tstraightenabeltinyour vehicle,takeittoyourauthorizeddealerimmediatelyandhaveitfixed.

1. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

1. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(i.e.,bentretractor,tornwebbing,etc.).

Lap/ShoulderBeltUntwistingProcedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180^ to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.

AutomaticLockingRetractors(ALR)Mode—If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.

WhenToUseTheAutomaticLockingMode

Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

HowToEngageTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowToDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

SeatBeltPretensioners—IfEquipped

The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.

These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

HowtheActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.

022607508

ActiveHeadRestraint(AHR)Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)

2 — Seatback

3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)

4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE47

CAUTION!

Alloccupants, including the driver, should not operate vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to "Adjusting Active Head Restraints" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

ResettingActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, you must reset the head restraint on the driver's and front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure).

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with hands on their head, no text or symbols present

HandPositioningPointsOnAHR

1. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.

2. Pull downthen rearwardtowards the rear of the vehicle then downto engage the locking mechanism.

022607497

1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement

3D rendered mechanical component with a downward arrow and number 3 label (no text or symbols on the object itself)

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism

1. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE49

3D rendered image of a car seatbelt with a handle and neck (no text or symbols)

AHRInResetPosition

022607494

NOTE:

• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.

50 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)

If the driver's seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert® will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert® will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver's seat belt is buckled. The BeltAlert® will be reactivated if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert® will be reactivated if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert® Programming

BeltAlert ^® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:

NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START, buckle the driver's seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
   NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver's seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE51

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and turn off while re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially after unbuckling it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.

BeltAlert ^® can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver's seat belt is unbuckled.

SeatBeltsandPregnantWomen

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

SeatBeltExtender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender, and stow it.

WARNING!

Usingaseatbeltextenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofinjuryinacollision.Only use whenthelapbeltisnotlongenoughwhenitisworn lowandsnug,andintherecommendedseating positions.Removeandstoretheextenderwhennot needed.

SupplementalRestraintSystem(SRS)-Airbags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

FrontAirbagComponents

1 — Driver Advanced Front Airbag
2 — Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags.

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags.

NOTE:

- Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.

- After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

AirbagSystemComponents

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
- Airbag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
- Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors

54 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger

AdvancedFrontAirbagFeatures

The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverornearthe airbagontheinstrumentpanel, becauseanysuch objectscouldcauseharmifthevehicleisina collisionsevereenoughtocausetheairbagto inflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbag coversorattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured becausetheairbagsmaynolonger befunctional. The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designedtoopenonlywhentheairbagsareinflating.
• Donotdrill, cutortamper with the kneeebolsterin anyway.

(Continued)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE55

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneebolster suchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenbandradios, etc.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirbags(SAB)

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.

022632683

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirbagLabel

When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each airbag deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only the right airbag.

- Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandthesideairbags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscould bepushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

1. Children12yearsoldandundershouldalwaysride buckledupinarearseat.

WARNING!

InfantsinrearfacingchildrestraintsshouldNEVER rideinthefrontseatofvehiclewithapassenger AdvancedFrontAirbag.Anairbagdeploymentcan causesvereinjuryordeathtoinfantsinthatposition.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE57

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

1. AlloccupantsshouldALWAYSweartheirlapand shoulderbeltsproperly.
2. Thedriverandfrontpassengerseatsshouldbe movedbackasfaraspracticaltoallowtheAdvanced FrontAirbagsroomtoinflate.

3. Donotleanagainstthedoororwindow.Ifyour vehiclehassideairbags,anddeploymentoccurs,the sideairbagswillinflateforcefullyintothespacebetweenyouandthedoor.

4. If the air bagsystem in this vehicle need to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance".

WARNING!

- Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbeltseventhoughyouhave airbags.

(Continued)

• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringAdvancedFrontAirbagdeployment couldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Airbagsneedroomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortably extendingyourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelor instrumentpanel.
• Sideairbagsalsoneedroomtoinflate.Donotlean againstthedoororwindow.Situprightinthe centeroftheseat.

AirbagDeploymentSensorsandControls

OccupantRestraintController(ORC)

The ORCis part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic

ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE59

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

IgnoringtheAirbagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbagsto protectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,haveanauthorizeddealerservicethe airbagsystemimmediately.

DriverandPassengerAirbagInflatorUnits

The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirbagInflator Units—IfEquipped

The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. These include all of the items previously mentioned.

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force, that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.

FrontandSideImpactSensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOUR VEHICLE

power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

IfaDeploymentOccurs

The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.

If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for

airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioners,andthefrontpassengerseat beltretractorassemblyreplacedbyanauthorized dealerassoonaspossible.Also,havetheOccupant RestraintControllerSystemservicedaswell.

MaintainingYourAirbagSystem

WARNING!

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumper,vehiclebodystructure, oraddaftermarketsidestepsorrunningboards.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartofthe airbagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE63

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyouradvancedairbagsystem.Theairbagmayinflate accidentallyormaynotfunctionproperlyifmodificationsaremade.Takeyourvehicletoanauthorizeddealerforanyadvancedairbagsystemservice.Ifyourseatincludingyourtrimcoverand cushionneedstobeservicedinanyway(includingremovalorloosening/tighteningofseatattachmentbolts),takethevehicletoyourauthorized dealer.Onlymanufacturerapprovedseataccessoriesmaybeused.Ifitisnecessarytomodifythe airbagsystemforpersonswithdisabilities,contact yourauthorizeddealer.

(Continued)

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AirbagWarningLight

You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system immediately.

• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the six to eight second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment. EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:

1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.

Data parameters that are recorded:

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM

• Brake switch status

• Pedal position

• And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration

ChildRestraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the front.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child, even atiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, no matter how strongly you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicles should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat owner's manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

InfantsandChildRestraints

• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the

LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to "LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)".

WARNING!

Rearward-facingchildseatsmustNEVERbeusedin thefrontseatofavehiclewithafrontpassenger airbag.Anairbagdeploymentcouldcausesevere injuryordeathtoinfantsinthisposition.

OlderChildrenandChildRestraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child

restraint anchorage system. Refer to "LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)".

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle's seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, then the child should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

ChildrenTooLargeforBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

NOTE: For additional information, referto www.seatcheck.orgorcall1-866-SEATCHECK.Canadianresidents, should referto Transport Canada's website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Arearward-facingchildrestraintshouldonlybe usedinarearseat.Arearward-facingchildrestraintinthefrontseatmaybestruckbyadeployingpassengerairbag,whichmaycausesevereor fatalinjurytotheinfant.

Herearesometipsongettingthemostoutofyourchild restraint:

• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.

• All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions.

CAUTION!

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with these seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Donot leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and causes serious personal injury.

LATCH—ChildSeatAnchorageSystem(Lower AnchorsandTetherforChildren)

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides

for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle's seat belts. The two rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments or fixed lower attachments. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVERinstall LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belts. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to "Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System".

RearSeatLATCHAnchors

Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles.

Interior view of a car dashboard with visible seat contours and black arrows pointing to specific areas (no text or symbols)

RearSeatLATCHAnchors

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.

InstallingtheLATCH-CompatibleChildRestraint System

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child

restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position. Access ports to the tether anchors are located in the panel between the rear seat and the rear window. The tether anchors are underneath access covers in the carpet covering the back of the seat where you see this symbol.

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap.

You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint, push the tether strap and hook through the access port and down into the trunk. Open the access cover on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor. Be careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child

restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING!

Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofaninfantor childrestraint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactly wheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingtheVehicleSeat Belts

The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint.

The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” for further information. A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the webbing to retract. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button, and allow the webbing to retract into the retractor.

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.

If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

1. If lowered, raise the convertible top.

NOTE: The convertible top must be in the UP position to access the tether anchor.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE75

1. Open the access port cover (A) behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.

ChildTetherAccessPortCover

1. Push the tether strap and hook (B) through the access port and down into the trunk.

NOTE: Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path from the child seat to the anchor.

1. Open the access cover (C) on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook (D) to the anchor.

ChildTetherAnchor

1. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchorpositionsdirectlybehind thechildseattosecureachildrestrainttoptether strap.

TransportingPets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINEBREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE77

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle". NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

TransportingPassengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

ExhaustGas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO) follow the safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

(Continued)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE79

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SafetyChecksYouShouldMakeInsidethe Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

AirbagWarningLight

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

FloorMatSafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedalsthatcannotmovefreelycancauselossof vehiclecontrolandincreasetheriskofseriouspersonalinjury.

• Alwaysmakesurethatfloormatsareproperly attachedtothefloormatfasteners.
• Neverplaceorinstallfloormatsorotherfloor coveringsinthevehiclethatcannotbeproperly securedtopreventthemfrommovingandinterferingwiththepedalsortheabilitytocontrolthe vehicle.
• Neverputfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringson topofalreadyinstalledfloormats.Additional floormatsandothercoveringswillreducethesize ofthepedalareaandinterferewiththepedals.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Checkmountingofmatsonaregularbasis.Alwaysproperlyreinstallandsecurefloormatsthat havebeenremovedforcleaning.
• Alwaysmakesurethatobjectscannotfallintothe driverfootwellwhilethevehicleismoving. Objectscanbecometrappedunderthebrakepedal andacceleratorpedalcausingalossofvehicle control.
• Ifrequired,mountingpostsmustbeproperly installed,ifnotequippedfromthefactory. Failuretoproperlyfollowfloormatinstallationor mountingcancauseinterferencewiththebrake pedalandacceleratorpedaloperationcausingloss ofcontrolofthevehicle.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE81

PeriodicSafetyChecksYouShouldMakeOutside the Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Convertible Top Operation....87

□Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions....88

□Cargo Shield 92

□Power Convertible Top Controls....94

□Lowering The Power Convertible Top ..... 9 5

□Raising The Power Convertible Top ..... 9 6

□Wind Stop — If Equipped ..... 9 7

□Power Convertible Top Operation And Warning Messages.... 1 01

☐Emergency Bypass Mode (To Raise The Top Only) 10 8

■ Mirrors 109

□Automatic Dimming Mirror 109

□ Outside Mirrors 110

□Power Mirrors 110

□ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 111

□ Vanity Mirror — If Equipped ..... 112

■ Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ..... 112

84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

■Voice Command — If Equipped ..... 1 1 2

■Seats 1 1 3

□Power Seats.... 1 1 3

□Heated Seats — If Equipped ..... 1 1 4

□Recliner Adjustment....116

□Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6

□Easy Entry System.... 1 1 7

□Adjusting Active Head Restraints....118

■To Open And Close The Hood ..... 1 2 1

■Lights....123

□Multifunction Lever.... 1 2 3

□Headlights And Parking Lights....124

□Lights-On Reminder 124

□ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..... 124

□ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) 125

□ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ..... 125

□Instrument Panel Dimmer....126

□Fog Lights — If Equipped 127

□ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 127

□Turn Signals 128

□Lane Change Assist.... 1 2 8

□High/Low Beam Switch....128

□Flash-To-Pass....128

□ Interior Lights 129

□Battery Saver Feature.... 1 2 9

■Windshield Wipers And Washers.... 1 3 0

□Intermittent Wiper System....131

□Mist Feature 132

□Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto Headlights Only).... 1 3 3

□Windshield Washers.... 1 3 3

■Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column....134

Electronic Speed Control 135

□To Activate.... 135

□To Set a Desired Speed.... 1 3 6

□To Deactivate.... 136

□To Resume Speed....136

□ To Vary The Speed Setting ..... 136

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE 85

□ To Accelerate For Passing 137

Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . 1 3 8

□ Programming HomeLink ^® 139

□ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 142

□Security 143

□ Troubleshooting Tips 143

□General Information.... 143

■ Electrical Power Outlets 144

■Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver — If Equipped.... 1 4 7

■Cupholders.... 148

□ Front Seat Cupholder 148

□Rear Seat Cupholders 148

86UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

■Console Features.... 1 4 9

□Storage 149

□Sliding Armrest — If Equipped ..... 1 5 1

■Rear Window Features.... 1 5 1

□Rear Window Defroster.... 1 5 1

CONVERTIBLETOPOPERATION

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mild dew on the top material:

• Avoidhigh-pressurecarwashes, astheycandamagethetopmaterial. Also, increased waterpressure may force past the weather strips.
• Removeanystandingwaterfromthetopanddry thesurfacebeforeopeningit.Operatingthetop, openingadoorloweringawindowwhilethe topiswetmayallowwatertodripintothe vehiclesinterior.
• Usecarewhenwashingthevehicle,waterpressure directedattheweatherstripsealsmaycausewater toleakintothevehiclesinterior.

WARNING!

Theconvertibletopdoesnotprovidethestructural protectionthatareinforcedmetalroofdoesandthe fabrictopcannotbeexpectedtopreventtheejection oftheoccupantsinacollision.Therefore,itisimportantthatalloccupantsweartheirseatbeltsatall times.Deathorseriousinjuriescouldoccurifyouare ejectedfromthevehicleduringacollision.

You can lower or raise the power convertible top from inside the vehicle or lower the top remotely using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Either operation takes approximately 30 seconds. The entire process, including unlatching or latching the top at the windshield header is automatic.

The top does take up some space in the trunk when retracted. However, the trunk will still hold a significant amount of cargo.

88UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

When operating the power convertible top, the trunk lid will pivot at the rear of the vehicle, swing open by the rear window, and then pivot backward. This allows room for the top to retract into or unfold from its stowage area in the trunk.

When lowering the top, the system extends the hard tonneau cover, which stows conveniently underneath the trunk lid. The tonneau cover closes the area between the rear seats and the trunk lid to conceal the top when stowed.

When raising the top, the system retracts the hard tonneau cover back into its stowage area underneath the trunk lid.

To complete either operation, the trunk lid returns to its normal position and then latches.

Spring-loaded flipper doors, which provide clearance for the linkage, close off notches in the quarter trim panels when the top is down.

PowerConvertibleTopUsagePrecautions

NOTE:

• The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is stationary, the cargo shield is positioned correctly, and the trunk lid is closed and latched. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 32^ F ( 0^ C) or lower. However, the system allows you to raise the top at ambient temperatures as low as 0^ F (-18°C).

• Do not attempt to lower the top when frost, ice, or snow may be present, this could cause damage or prevent the top from stowing completely.

• The Power Top Control Module (PTCM) monitors and controls lowering and raising of the top. A series of micro-switches verify that operations are complete before allowing the next stage of lowering or raising operation.

• Opening and closing the top consecutively without the engine running may run the battery down.
• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts while driving with the top down, safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition.

CAUTION!

• Correctlypositionthecargoshieldinthetrunk beforestowingthetop.Doingsoclosesaswitch thatallowstopoperation(stowing)toproceed.If theswitchisnotclosed,awarningmessagedisplaysintheinstrumentclustertonotifythedriver.
• Alwaysplaceitemscarefullyintothetrunk.
• Donotpushitemstoofarintothetrunk, particularlywhenthetopisretractedintoitsstowagearea inthetrunk.
• Donotusetheareanearthetonneaucoverfor storage.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, and the vehicle interior.

90UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Beforeoperatingthepowertop:

• Alwayscheckthetonneaucoverareatobesure thatitisclearofdebrisorotheritems.
• Makesuretheambienttemperatureisabove32°F (0°C).
• Neverattempttolowerafrozenconvertibletop. Waituntilthetopisthawedbeforeloweringitinto thestowagecompartment. Loweringaclothtopat temperaturesbelow32°F(0°C)shouldbeavoided.
• Makesuretheconvertibletopisdrybeforeloweringitintothestowagecompartment. Lowering thetopwhendamp, wet, ordirtycancausestains, mildew, and damagetotheinsideofyourvehicle.
• Makesurethereissufficientclearanceofatleast 7.5ft.(2.2m)forthetoptomoveup.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Topreventstrikingalowceilingorautomaticdoor openerwiththetop,itisstronglyrecommended thatyoudonotoperatethepowertopinsidea garageorparkingstructure.
  Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, and the vehicle interior.

CAUTION!

Failuretofollowthesecautionscancausedamageto theconvertibletopcomponents,trunkcontents,and thevehicleinterior:

- Donotoperatethepowertopwiththehydraulic pumpvalveopen.

(Continued)

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotallowthetoptoremaininthesuspended position. After approximately 10 minutes in the suspended position, the hydraulic pressure will release, which will allow the top and the trunk lid to lower. Pressing the powertop switch will cancel this operation.
• Alwaysuseanormalicescrapertoremovesnowor icefromtherearwindow.Useofasharpobjector othertoolscouldscratchthefabricorpanelswhen removingsnoworice.
• Alwaysclosethetopwhenleavingyourvehicleso asnottoleavetheinteriorexposedtopotentially damagingoutdoorconditions.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotleavethetoploweredforseveralweeksat atime.Closeitoccasionallytopreventdiscolorationinthefoldsofthefabricandtoallowthe creasestosmoothout.Thisisespeciallyimportant ifthetopwasstowedwhennotcompletelydry.

WARNING!

Failuretofollowthesewarningscanresultinjuries thatareseriousorfataltoyou,yourpassengers,and othersaroundyou:

- Beforeoperatingthepowertop, makesurethatno movingpartsoftheconvertibletopcaninjurea personoranimal.

(Continued)

92UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverplaceanyextremities(hands,feet,etc.)near theconvertibletopcomponents,theupperwindshieldarea,theshelfareabehindtherearseats,or theconvertibletopstowageareawhileraisingor loweringtheconvertibletop.
• WhenusingthepowertopbuttononRKEtransmitter,ifpotentialdangerexistswhilelowering thetop,releasethebuttonimmediatelytointerrupttheoperation.
• Whenusingthepowertopswitchontheinstrumentpanel,ifpotentialdangerexistswhileloweringthetop,releasetheswitchimmediatelyto interrupttheoperation.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Whenusingthepowertopswitchontheinstrumentpanel,ifpotentialdangerexistswhileraising thetop,releasetheswitchimmediatelytointerrupttheoperation.
• Onlydrivethevehiclewiththeconvertibletop completelyclosedandlatchedorfullylowered intoitsstowagecompartment.
• Donotoperatethepowertopwhenthevehicleis inmotion.

CargoShield

The cargo shield is located in the trunk. Before lowering the convertible top, you must unfold the cargo shield and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots in the trunk liner. Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation. If the switch is not closed, a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE93

PositioningtheCargoShieldforTopOperation

Pull the cargo shield toward you to begin unfolding the panels. Grasp the handle in the center of the outermost (top) panel and raise the cargo shield. Then, align and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots in the trunk liner as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION!

DoNOTplaceitemsoncargoprotector.Itemsplaced oncargoprotectorwillinterferewiththetopduring operationandcauseexcessivedamagetothetop.

Interior view of a car showing structural components with two black arrows pointing to specific areas (no text or symbols present)

CargoShield

PositioningtheCargoShieldforCargoStorage

To maximize the storage space in the trunk, the cargo shield can be stowed in the forward portion of the trunk.

94UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

To stow the cargo shield, grasp the handle of the upright panel of the cargo shield, lifting the pins out of the V slots in the trunk trim. Continue folding the upright panel forward onto the horizontal panel, then grasp both panels and lift them to the forward, upright position in the trunk.

Interior view of a car's dashboard and engine compartment showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

StowedCargoShield

NOTE: The convertible top will NOT operate with the cargo shield in the stowed position.

PowerConvertibleTopControls

The power top switch is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a black arrow pointing to the control panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerTopSwitch

There is also a power top button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter for remotely lowering the power convertible top.

PowerTopButton

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

LoweringthePowerConvertibleTop

UsingthePowerTopSwitch

NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay.

There are two Top Down switch positions.

Press and hold the switch to the first detent.

The system will lower all fully raised windows approximately 0.5 in (10 mm), lower the top to

its fully retracted position, and then raise the windows. Press and hold the switch to the second detent. The system will lower all four windows and the top to their fully retracted positions.

The driver has to press and hold the convertible top switch during the entire opening cycle, if there is an obstruction and the driver is alerted, the convertible top operation can be stopped by releasing the switch.

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UsingtheRemoteKeylessEntryTransmitter

NOTE:Steps 1 - 3 must be performed within five seconds.

1. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

1. Press and release the POWER TOP button on the RKE transmitter.

2. Press and hold the POWER TOP button until the Power Top and All Windows Down feature is complete.

RaisingthePowerConvertibleTop

UsingthePowerTopSwitch

NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay.

Press and hold the switch in the Top Up position until the operation of raising the top and latching it is complete, which is indicated by the system raising the windows and dis-

playing "TOP DONE" in the odometer or "CONVERTIBLE TOP COMPLETE" in the EVIC (if equipped).

UsingtheRemoteKeylessEntryTransmitter

You cannot use the power top button on the RKE transmitter to raise the power convertible top. You must use the power top switch inside the vehicle to perform this operation.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE97

Manually

Closing the power convertible top manually is a complicated and physically demanding procedure, and it requires a special tool to do so. In the event that you experience a malfunction when operating the power convertible top:

1. Read all of the Notes, Cautions, and Warning found under "Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions" to verify all operating conditions are met.
2. Check for Operation and Warning Messages as described under "Power Convertible Top Operation and Warning Messages." If applicable, perform the related action to correct the condition present.
3. If Steps 1 and 2 do not resolve the problem, refer to "Emergency Bypass Mode".

WindStop—IfEquipped

The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. However, when not in use, the Wind Stop folds to allow for convenient storage underneath the cargo shield in the trunk.

NOTE: It is recommended that you lower the convertible top before installing or removing the Wind Stop.

InstallingtheWindStop

1. Remove the Wind Stop from the trunk.
2. Unfold the Wind Stop framework.
3. Lay the small frame (1) flat on top of the large frame (2) and snap the two frames together by engaging the frame lock (3).

98UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: The frames must lie flat on each other in order to snap them together.

1. Pivot the small frame (1) away from the large frame (2) until the pivot lock (3) engages to lock the two frames in an L shape.

81bc41bb

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE99

1. Unfold both stems at the rear of the large frame. 6. Align and insert the stems into the slot in each trim panel.

Technical line drawing of a car frame structure with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Mechanical component diagram showing internal structure with arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

100UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Align the pins at the front of the large frame with the hole in each trim panel. Slide the pins outward until fully extended into each hole.

Technical diagram of a car rear panel showing structural components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

RemovingandStoringtheWindStop

Reverse the installation procedure to remove, fold, and store the Wind Stop. However, note the following before doing so:

Disengage the pivot lock (1) to fold the small frame flat onto the large frame. Disengage the frame lock (2) to disconnect the small frame from the large frame.

PowerConvertibleTopOperationandWarning Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the PTCM displays various power convertible top operation and warning messages in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE101

(EVIC) – if equipped, or in the Odometer for vehicles not equipped with the EVIC. Refer to the following chart for message related information:

EVICMessage◇	EVICMessageDisplayTime◇	OdometerMessage(<5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	OdometerMessage(>5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	ChimeConditionOperatorActionRequired
CONVERT-IBLE TOPNOT SECURED	Until Operation is Complete	TOP nOTSECUrE	Until Operation is Complete	— — — The Sys-		—tem is Lowering or Raising the Top

102UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

EVICMessage◇	EVICMessageDisplayTime◇	OdometerMessage(<5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	OdometerMessage(>5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	ChimeConditionOperatorActionRequired
CONVERT-IBLE TOPCOMPLETE	9 sec. TOP	DONE	DisplayScrolls for6 sec.	— — Single		Chime	The System Completes Operation ofLowering or Raising the Top	—
SECURECARGOSHIELD	9 sec. SET	CARGOSHIELD	DisplayScrolls for9 sec.	— — Single		Chime	The Top Fails toMoveWhen Operating the Power Top Control	Position the Cargo Shield in the Trunk to Allow Top Operation

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE103

EVICMessage◇	EVICMessageDisplayTime◇	OdometerMessage(<5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	OdometerMessage(>5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	ChimeConditionOperatorActionRequired
CONVERT-IBLE TOPNOT SECURED	Until Operation is Complete	TOP nOTSECUrE	Until Operation is Complete	TOP nOTSECUrE	Until Operation is Complete	Single Chime	The System Fails to Complete Operation of Lowering or Raising the Top	Cycle Power Top Control

104UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

EVICMessage◇	EVICMessageDisplayTime◇	OdometerMessage(<5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	OdometerMessage(>5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	ChimeConditionOperatorActionRequired
SPEEDTOO HIGH	9 sec. SPEED	TOOHIGH	DisplayScrolls for9 sec.	TOP 6 sec.	Single	Chime	You AreOperatingthe PowerTop a t aVehicleSpeedGreaterThan0 mph(0 km/h)	The TopWill NotOperateUnless theVehicle isStationary.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE105

EVICMessage◇	EVICMessageDisplayTime◇	OdometerMessage(<5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	OdometerMessage(>5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	ChimeConditionOperator		ActionRequired
TRUNKAJAR	Continuous	DECK Continuous	Continuous	DECK Continuous	Continuous	SingleChime	The TrunkLid is Un-latched orOpen	The TopWill NotOperateUnless theTrunk Lidis Closed
CONVERT-IBLE TOPMAL-FUNCTION	6 sec. TOP	AIL Display	Scrolls for6 Seconds	TOP 6 sec.	Single	Chime	The PTCMActivatedthe SystemLOCKOUTFeature	Refer toFoot Note◇◇◇

106UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

EVICMessage◇	EVICMessageDisplayTime◇	OdometerMessage(<5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	OdometerMessage(>5mph[8km/h])◇◇	OdometerMessageDisplayTime◇◇	ChimeConditionOperatorActionRequired
CONVERT-IBLE TOPMAL-FUNCTION	Until Faultis NoLongerDetectedor Re-paired	TOP FAIL	DisplayScrolls un-til Fault isNo LongerDetectedor Re-paired	TOP Display	Flashesuntil Faultis NoLongerDetectedor Re-paired	SingleChime	The PTCMActivatedthe SystemLOCKOUTFeature	See yourauthorizeddealer forservice

◇ If so equipped.
◇ ◇ For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC.
◇◇◇ The PTCM will lockout the power convertible top system if the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, or the battery is run down, or the hydraulic pump is overheating. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 0^ F ( -18^ C) or lower and raising the top when ambient temperature is below -40^ F ( -40^ C).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE107

• If you are trying to lower the top and ambient temperature is 0^ (-18°C) or lower, wait until the temperature rises and the top is thawed and dry before operating the power top. A soft top should not be lowered at temperatures below 32^ (0°C).
• If you are trying to raise the top and ambient temperature is below -40^ (-40°C), wait until the temperature rises before operating the power top.
• If the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, see your authorized dealer for service.
• If the battery is run down, have it recharged and tested at your authorized dealer.
• Hydraulic pump overheating can occur if you lower and raise the top consecutively (usually more than six or seven times depending upon the ambient temperature). Wait at least five minutes before operating the power top again. NOTE: If lockout occurs due to hydraulic pump overheating, the system will allow you to raise the top without waiting five minutes. However, do so only if necessary.

108UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

EmergencyBypassMode(ToRaisetheTopOnly)

This procedure is only to be used to raise the top when the top cannot be returned to the UP (raised) position by pressing the POWER TOP switch or is in a position in which the vehicle cannot be driven. Please follow these emergency bypass instructions to return the top to the UP (raised) position.

Press the POWER TOP switch in the Top Up direction five times within two seconds and hold the switch in the Top Up position for a minimum of two minutes.

CAUTION!

- Oncethisprocedurehasbeencompletedandthe topisintheUP(raised)position,seeyourauthorizeddealer.DONOTexceed40mph(64km/h).

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Using the Emergency Bypass Mode could potentially damage the convertible top and should only be used for a subset of the power to the UP (raised) position when then normal top operation is not functioning.

If damage starts to occur while in the Emergency Bypass Mode, immediately release the power top switch and see your authorized dealer.

NOTE: This procedure may take more time to fully raise and close the power top. It is not uncommon to see delays of up to 30 seconds before operation begins.

MIRRORS

AutomaticDimmingMirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE109

81c7a8c8
1 — Auto Dimming Mirror Power Indicator
2 — On/Off Switch
3 — Auto Dimming Mirror Sensor

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleanings solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

110UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

OutsideMirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassengerside convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passengersideconvexmirrorcouldcauseyouto collidewithanothervehicleorotherobject.Useyour insidemirrorwhenjudgingthesizeordistanceofa vehicleseeninthepassengersideconvexmirror.

PowerMirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.

Close-up of a car's front dashboard with a black control knob and directional arrow (no text or symbols on the main component)

PowerMirrorAdjustSwitch

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. When finished, return the knob to the center "O" (Off) position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.

Close-up of a car's side mirror with four black arrows pointing outward (no text or symbols)

MirrorDirections

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE111

HeatedMirrors—IfEquipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle" for further information.

112UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

VanityMirror—IfEquipped

A vanity mirror is attached to the inside face of the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and flip the mirror cover upward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted rectangular panel and mounting fixtures (no text or symbols)

VanityMirror

Uconnect™Phone—IFEQUIPPED

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

VOICECOMMAND—IFEQUIPPED

Voice Command can be initiated by pressing the VR button ( 12 VR located on the radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped).

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE113

SEATS

Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• DONOTallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareas aremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerSeatSwitch

PowerSeats

The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.

114UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

• Adjustingseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseat couldcauseyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmight notbeproperlyadjustedandyoucouldbeinjured. Adjusttheseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.
• Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyour chest.Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseat beltandbeseriouslyorevenfatallyinjured.Use thereclineronlywhenthevehicleisparked.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleunderanyseatasitmay causedamagetotheseatcontrols.

HeatedSeats—IfEquipped

The driver and front passenger seats are heated. The controls for each heater are located in the instrument panel switch bank above the climate controls.

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High, Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for Off.

Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE115

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel a painting the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise when using these at least one. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long period so time.
• Donotplaceanythingontheseatthatinsulates againstheat,suchasablanketorcushion.This maycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sittingina seatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcauseserious burnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureof theseat.

CAUTION!

Repeated overheating of these seat could damage the heating element and or degrade them material of the seat.

116UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ReclinerAdjustment

The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever. Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

SeatbackAdjustment

WARNING!

- Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseat couldcauseyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmight notbeproperlyadjustedandyoucouldbeinjured. Adjusttheseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.

- Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyour chest.Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseat beltandbeseriouslyorevenfatallyinjured.Use thereclineronlywhenthevehicleisparked.

LumbarSupport—IfEquipped

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. The control lever is on the inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE117

Interior view of a car showing the seat and neck area with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

LumbarSupportEasyEntryLever

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to a specific component (no text or symbols visible)

EasyEntrySystem

The Easy Entry lever is located on upper seat belt anchor cover.

Pull the lever upward to move the seat and seatback forward.

When returning the seat to its normal position, the memory feature restores the seat position and seatback recline position to their current settings.

118UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

On the driver seat, pull the lever upward to move the seatback forward.

When returning the seatback to its normal position the memory feature restores the seatback recline position to its current setting.

AdjustingActiveHeadRestraints

Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Side profile illustration of a person wearing a car seatbelt (no text or symbols)

AdjustedHeadRestraint

030907652

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint (on some models, you may need to press the push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

3D model of a car headrest with a black arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

PushButton

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE119

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.

3D rendered image of a car seat with a neck and side arm (no text or symbols)

ActiveHeadRestraint(NormalPosition)

022607494

120UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

3D rendered image of a car headrest with a left-pointing arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

030907533

ActiveHeadRestraint(Tilted)

NOTE:

- The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

- In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to "Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)" in "Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Drivingvehiclewiththeheadrestraintsremoved orimproperlyadjustedcouldcauseseriousinjury ordeathintheeventofacollision.Thehead restraintsshouldalwaysbecheckedpriortooperatingthevehicleandneveradjustedwhilethe vehicleisinmotion.Alwaysadjustthehead restraintswhenthevehicleisinPARK.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE121

WARNING!(Continued)

• DonotplaceitemsoverthetopoftheActiveHead Restraint,suchascoats,seatcoversorportable DVDplayers.Theseitemsmayinterferewiththe operationoftheActiveHeadRestraintintheevent ofanaccidentandcouldresultinseriousinjuryor death.
• ActiveHeadRestraintsmaybedeployedifthey arestruckbyanobjectsuchasahand,footorloose cargo.ToavoidaccidentaldeploymentoftheActiveHeadRestraintensurethatallcargoissecured,asloosecargocouldcontacttheActiveHead Restraintduringsuddenstops.Failureretofollow thiswarningcouldcausepersonalinjuryifthe ActiveHeadRestraintisdeployed.

TOOPENANDCLOSETHEHOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.

Close-up of a car air conditioner control panel with a white arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

HoodReleaseLever

122UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Move to the outside of the vehicle and lift the secondary latch underneath the center front edge of the hood and raise the hood.

Front view of a car with a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols)

030407192

HoodSafetyCatch

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood.

Close-up of cable fastening technique showing rope routing and mechanical components (no text or symbols)

HoodPropRodHoleLocation

Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE123

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehoodto closeit. Useafirmdownwardpushatthecenterof thehoodtoensurethatbothlatchesengage.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

LIGHTS

MultifunctionLever

The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights (if equipped).

MultifunctionLever

031407547

124UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

HeadlightsAndParkingLights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation.

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.

AutomaticHeadlights—IfEquipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.

HeadlightswithWipers(AvailablewithAutomatic HeadlightsOnly)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

HeadlightTimeDelay—IfEquipped

This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE125

To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time.

If you turn the headlights, parking lights, or ignition switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

126UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

InstrumentPanelDimmer

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.

Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting.

DimmerControl

FogLights—IfEquipped

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever.

031407550

FrontFogLightControl

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE127

NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights.

DaytimeRunningLights—IfEquipped

The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK.

NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating.

128UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

TurnSignals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

TurnSignalControl

LaneChangeAssist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/LowBeamSwitch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the Flash-To-Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before activating the Flash-To-Pass function again.

InteriorLights

Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.

Front view of a car rearview mirror with two black arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

031433063
Courtesy/ReadingLightSwitches

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

129

A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center console. You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.

BatterySaverFeature

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open.

130UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

Black handheld device with visible control buttons (no readable text or symbols)

031508787

WindshieldWiper/WasherLever

Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for high-speed wiper operation.

Black handheld device with circular arrows indicating rotation or cycle (no text or symbols visible)

031508788

ChangingWiperSpeeds

NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the "Park" position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they are operating. The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.

CAUTION!

• Turnthewindshieldwipersoffwhendriving throughanautomaticcarwash.Damagetothe windshieldwipersmayresultifthewipercontrol isleftinanypositionotherthanoff.
• Alwaysremoveanybuildupofsnowthatprevents thewindshieldwiperbladesfromreturningtothe offposition.Ifthewindshieldwipercontrolis turnedoffandthebladescannotreturntotheoff position,damagetothewipermotormayoccur.

IntermittentWiperSystem

Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE131

regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles.

Black handheld device with control buttons and directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols on body)

031508788

ChangingIntermittentSettings

132UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshield couldleadtoanaccident.Youmightnotseeother vehiclesorotherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingof thewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthe windshieldwithdefrosterbeforeandduringwind-shieldwasheruse.

MistFeature

Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever.

Black rocket launcher with visible control buttons and a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

031508789

MistControl

HeadlightswithWipers(AvailablewithAuto HeadlightsOnly)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE133

WindshieldWashers

To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.

If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off.

134UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

TILT/TELESCOPINGSTEERINGCOLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, pull the control handle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Besurethe steeringcolumnislockedbeforedrivingyourve- hicle.Failureretofollowthiswarningmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

ELECTRONICSPEEDCONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel.

81bc4c2c

ElectronicSpeedControlLever

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE135

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

ToActivate

Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push and release the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE indicator will turn off. Be sure to turn the system off when not in use.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system will automatically turn off when the ignition is turned OFF.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlonwhennotin useisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentallysetthe systemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant.You couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemoffwhenyouarenotusingit.

ToSetaDesiredSpeed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press down on the lever and release SET DECEL. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph (40 km/h) for the Electronic Speed Control to set.
• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the lever SET DECEL.

ToDeactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you (CANCEL), or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory.

ToResumeSpeed

If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set speed. To do so, push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL, and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

ToVarytheSpeedSetting

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME

ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a1mph (2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released. Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.

Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped, speed decreases.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrol.Anaccidentcouldbetheresult. DonotuseElectronicSpeedControlinheavytraffic oronroadsthatarewinding,icy,snow-covered,or slippery.

ToAccelerateforPassing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

138UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrol.Anaccidentcouldbetheresult. DonotuseElectronicSpeedControlinheavytraffic oronroadsthatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredor slippery.

GARAGEDOOROPENER—IFEQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle's battery.

The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink® channels.

Simple illustration of a boat hull with three ovals and a small house symbol on the roof (no text or labels)

81cb44fe

HomeLink®Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

WARNING!

• Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouaretrainingtheuniversaltransceiver. Donottrainthetransceiverifpeople, petsorother objectsareinthepathofthedoororgate. Onlyuse thistransceiverwithagaragedooropenerthathas a"stopandreverse"featureasrequiredbyFederal safetystandards. Thisincludesmostgaragedoor openermodelsmanufacturedafter1982.Donot useagaragedooropenerwithoutthesesafety features. Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515or,onthe Internetatwww.HomeLink.comforsafetyinformationorassistance.
• Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegarage whiletrainingthetransceiver.Exhaustgascan causeseriousinjuryordeath.

ProgrammingHomeLink®

BeforeYouBegin

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink®buttons, erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink® for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming.

BeginProgramming

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.

140UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

1. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink® button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink® and handheld transmitter buttons.

Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you train.

NOTE:

- Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section.

• After training a HomeLink® channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink® and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so, proceed to Step 5 "Programming A Rolling Code System."
• Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door (or device) should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 "Programming A Rolling Code System."

5. ProgrammingARollingCodeSystem

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "Learn" or "Training" button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door.

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

141

1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

1. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink®button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink®buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

142UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

UsingHomeLink®

To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

ReprogrammingaSingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink®Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

GateOperator/CanadianProgramming

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step 3, with the following:

1. ContinuetopressandholdtheHomeLink® button, whileyoupressandrelease("cycle"),yourhandheld transmittereverytwosecondsuntilHomeLink® has

successfullyacceptedthefrequencysignal. The indicatorlightwillflashslowlyandthenrapidlywhenfully trained.

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time.

Then proceed with Step 4 under "Programming HomeLink®," earlier in this section.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink®Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE143

TroubleshootingTips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink ^® , here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

144 UNDERSTANDINGTHE FEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

ELECTRICALPOWEROUTLETS

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse.

NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

The instrument panel power outlet, located below the climate control knobs, has power available only when the ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.

NOTE: If desired, the instrument panel power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch while in the LOCK position.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE145

Interior view of a car dashboard with three circular gauges and a black arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

InstrumentPanelPowerOutletCenterConsole

The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

- Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeof outletshouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.

(Continued)

146UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledriving thevehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

- Manyaccessoriesthatcanbepluggedindraw powerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennotin use(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if pluggedinlongenough,thevehicle'sbatterywill dischargesufficientlytodegradebatterylife and/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe generatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE147

CIGARLIGHTERANDASHRECEIVER—IF EQUIPPED

An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

AshReceiver

CAUTION!

Forvehiclesequippedwiththeheatedandcooled cupholder,locatethecupholderashreceiverinthe forwardcupholder.

The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter. You may use the power outlet, located in the instrument panel below the climate control knobs, or in the bottom of the console compartment, for this cigar lighter.

148UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

FrontSeatCupholder

The cupholder in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz. (.5 L) bottles or cans. The one-piece insert can be removed easily for cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located in one of the cupholders.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

FrontCupholders

RearSeatCupholders

Cupholders for the rear seat occupants are located in the armrests. Each cupholder is capable of holding up to a 20 oz. (.5 L) bottle or can.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt tray and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

RearSeatCupholder

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE149

WARNING!

If containers of hot liquid are replace in the cup holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Becareful when closing the door to avoid injury.

CONSOLEFEATURES

Storage

The center console contains a cubby bin with flip-down cover located below the climate controls. This compartment also contains a 12 Volt electrical outlet.

WARNING!

Donotplaceashesinsidethecubbybinlocatedon thecenterconsole.Afireleadingtobodilyinjury couldresult.

Interior view of a car dashboard with three circular gauges and a central vent (no text or symbols visible)

CubbyBin

Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest.

150UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1 — Release button for top compartment

2 — Release button for bottom compartment

3 — Top Compartment

4 — Bottom Compartment. You can access this compartment directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down.

The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). The console's front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.

NOTE:

- A notch in the side of the console base allows for use of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power outlet with the armrest latched down.

- The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in the optional cup holder ash receiver.

SlidingArmrest—IfEquipped

On some models the center console armrest slides forward and rearward for added user comfort.

Interior view of a car seatbelt and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

ArmRest

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE151

REARWINDOWFEATURES

RearWindowDefroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparallelto theheatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoff aftersoakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■Instrument Panel Features.... 1 5 6

■Instrument Cluster 157

■Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..... 1 5 8

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If Equipped 172

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays 173

☐Oil Change Required — If Equipped ..... 174

□Trip Functions.... 175

□Compass Display 176

□Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features).... 179

■Setting The Analog Clock.... 182

■Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo Radio And 6-Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Jack)....182

□Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ..... 183

☐Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 191

□ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ..... 193

154UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

□List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play).... 195

☐Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play).... 195

■Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) — AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/ NAV — If Equipped.... 198

☐Operating Instructions — Voice Command System — If Equipped.... 198

☐Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped .... 198

□Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio ..... 198

☐Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio 200

■Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 2 0 2

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 202
☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 205
□Notes On Playing MP3 Files 208
☐Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 2 1 0

Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius Radio....211

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 2 1 1
☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play ..... 2 1 7
□Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..... 2 1 9
□ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 222
□ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 222

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155

☐Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped) 2 2 3

■Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RBZ/RES Radios Only). 2 2 3

□System Activation.... 2 2 3

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) 2 2 4

□Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode.... 2 2 4

□Satellite Antenna 2 2 4

□Reception Quality 2 2 5

☐Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ..... 2 2 5

☐Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped) 2 2 7

■Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped 2 2 8

□Right-Hand Switch Functions 2 2 8

□Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation.... 2 2 9

□Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD) Operation 2 2 9

■CD/DVD Disc Maintenance 2 2 9

■Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ..... 2 3 0

■Climate Controls 230

□Manual Heating And Air Conditioning....230

□Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped 235

□Operating Tips 240

156UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTPANELFEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio 11 — Hazard Switch
2 — Side Window Demister Outlet 7 — Passenger Airbag 12 — Storage Compartment
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Climate Control
4 — Ignition Switch 9 — Heated Seat Switch - If Equipped 14 — Trunk Release Button
5 — Analog Clock 10 — Electronic Stability Control Off Button

- If Equipped

15 — Power Top Switch

INSTRUMENTCLUSTER

158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENTCLUSTERDESCRIPTIONS

1. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.

If the pointer rises to the H(red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H(red) mark, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C

removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

2.FuelDoorReminder

This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle.

3.FuelGauge

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

4.Speedometer

Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159

5.LowFuelLight

When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound.

NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3.0 gallons (11.3 Liters) of fuel is added.

6.ChargingSystemLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's electrical devices, such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster. If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".

7. Airbag Warning Light

The light comes on and remains on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light does not turn on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

8.SeatBeltReminderLight

When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this light will come on for about six seconds. A chime will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt out of the retractor. This is a reminder to "buckle up". If

160UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

you do not buckle up, the light will remain on. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

9.OilPressureWarningLight

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine. DONOTOPERATE THEVEHICLEUNTILTHECAUSEISCORRECTED.

The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. This can be determined using the procedure shown in "Maintaining Your Vehicle".

10. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.

11.BrakeWarningLight

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththebrakelightonisdanger- ous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed.Itwill takelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhavean accident.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161

In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately three seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

162UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

12.Tachometer

The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.

13.ShiftLeverIndicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.

14.Odometer/TripOdometerDisplayArea

The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information.

VehicleOdometerMessages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will display the following messages:

door. .... DoorAjar deck. .... TrunkAjar TOPnOTSECUrE. .... ConvertibleTopNotSecure LoWTirE. .... Low Tire Pres HOTOIL. .... TransmissionOilTemperature ExceedsSafeThreshold gASCAP. .... FuelCapFault CHAngEOIL. .... Oil ChangeRequired

NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), then all warnings including "Low Tire," "Door Ajar" and "Trunk Ajar" will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" for specific messages).

LoWTirE

When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles.

HOTOIL

When this message is displayed there is a transmission over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, the "HOTOIL" message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime.

NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the message clears. Raising the idle of the engine slightly will help speed up the cooling.

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the words "gASCAP" will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs,

tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the "gASCAP" message. (Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information). If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible.

CHAngEOIL

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "CHAngE OIL" message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

1. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)".

15. CruiseIndicator—IfEquipped

CRUISE This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON.

16.Odometer/TripOdometerResetButton

SingleTripOdometer

Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer. The word "Trip" displays to show that the odometer is in Trip Mode. Press and release the button again to change the display back to the odometer.

To reset the trip odometer, first set the display to Trip Mode. Then push and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165

DualTripOdometer—IfEquipped

Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to "Trip A." Press and release it a second time to change the display to "Trip B." Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer.

To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage that you want to reset, "Trip A" or "Trip B." Then push and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.

17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. If the light remains

lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

166UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may require towing. Immediate service is required.

The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a bulb check. This is normal. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

1. PositionLightIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

1. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light—If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver.

20.TurnSignalIndicators

The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.

21.FrontFogLightIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

1. VehicleSecurityLight—IfEquipped

This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed. The light will stop

flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.

1. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light—If Equipped

This light monitors the ABS. This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required, however, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock Brakes.

The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should come on. If the light does not come on, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer.

1. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction Indicator Light—If Equipped

The "ESC Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the

"ESC Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

- The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

168UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENT PANEL

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

25. TirePressureMonitoringTelltaleLight

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly, when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotusetiresealantfromacan,or balancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.

170UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

26.MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause damagetotheenginecontrolsystem.Italsocould affectfueleconomyanddrivability.IftheMILis flashing,severecatalyticconverterdamage and powerlosswillsoonoccur.Immediateserviceis required.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach high temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drives lowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light—If Equipped

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the

vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

WARNING!

ContinuedoperationwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedcouldcausethefluidtoboilover,comeincontactwithhotengineorexhaustcomponentscausingafirethatmayresultinpersonalinjury.

28. HighBeamIndicator

This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.

29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display—If Equipped

This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.

172UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ELECTRONICVEHICLEINFORMATIONCENTER (EVIC)-IFEQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC)

The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status
  • Vehicle information warning message displays
  • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass heading display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
  • Outside temperature display (°F or °C)
• Trip computer functions
• Audio mode displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) displays (if equipped)

The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel switch bank located below the climate controls:

MENU

MENU Button

Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to Trip Functions or Personal settings or to return to the default System status display.

STEP Button

Press and release the STEP button to advance the display through the various Trip Functions or Personal Settings.

COMPASS Button

Press and release the COMPASS button to display the compass heading and the outside temperature.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173

Press and release the RESET Button to accept a selection. The RESET Button also resets various Trip Functions.

RESET Button

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC) Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
  • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion
• Left/Right Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Headlights On
  • Key In Ignition
• Convertible Top Not Secured (with a single chime)
• Convertible Top Complete (with a single chime)
• Secure Cargo Shield (with a single chime)

• Speed Too High (with a single chime)
- Convertible Top Malfunction (with a single chime)
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)

OilChangeRequired—IfEquipped

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

TripFunctions

Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:

• Average Fuel Economy
- Distance To Empty

- Elapsed Time

• Display Units of Measure in

Press and release the STEP button to advance the display through the Trip Functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:

• AverageFuelEconomy

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read, RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.

- DistanceToEmpty(DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous

and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.

- ElapsedTime

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

- DisplayUnitsIn:

To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears.

ToResetTheDisplay

Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently displayed. Press and hold the RESET button once to clear the function currently displayed.

To reset all resettable functions, press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will display during this three-second window).

CompassDisplay

COMPASS Button

The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the compass button to display one of eight compass heading and the outside temperature.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

AutomaticCompassCalibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360^ turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

ManualCompassCalibration

If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal, you may wish to calibrate the compass manually. However, prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance value is selected (Refer to "Compass Variance" for additional information). Then continue to calibrate the compass as follows:

1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press and release the MENU Button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the STEP button until "Calibrate Compass Yes" displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET Button and the CAL indicator will quit flashing.

178UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Drive the vehicle slowly, completing one or more circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.

CompassVariance

Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set using the following procedure:

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Cell Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the shift lever in PARK.

2. Press and release the MENU button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.

3. Press and release the STEP button until "Compass Variance" and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the RESET button to increment the Variance Value by one, (one button press per update), until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map.
   NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
5. Press and release the STEP button to exit. Press the STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manually (Refer to "Manual Compass Calibration").

PersonalSettings(Customer-Programmable Features)

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

Press and release the MENU button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.

Press and release the STEP button to display the following programmable features:

Language

When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.

AutoUnlockOnExit

When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.

180UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

RemoteKeyUnlock

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When AllDoors1stPressis selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "Driver Door 1st Press" or "All Doors 1st Press" appears.

SoundHornwithLOCK

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with LOCK feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.

FlashLightswithLOCK

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with LOCK feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.

HeadlightsOffDelay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears.

HeadlightsWithWipers(AvailablewithAuto HeadlightsOnly)

When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned

off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

KeyOffPowerDelay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button until OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears.

IlluminatedApproach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button until "OFF," "30 sec," "60 sec," or "90 sec" appears.

HillStartAssist(HSA)—IfEquipped

When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "On" or "Off" appears.

DisplayUnitsIn

The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears.

182UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SETTINGTHEANALOGCLOCK

Black-and-white photo of an analog clock face with hour and minute hands, surrounded by concentric rings and a small dot at the bottom (no text or symbols on the clock face)

To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held.

MEDIACENTER230(REQ)—AM/FMSTEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042005200

MediaCenter230(REQ)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183

OperatingInstructions-RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

VoiceCommandButtonUconnect™Phone—If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

184UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

PhoneButtonUconnect™Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the "SET HOME CLOCK" entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType16-DigitCharacterDisplay
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacterDisplay
Jazz Jazz
News	News
Nostalgia	Nostalga
Oldies	Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public	Public
Rhythm and Blues	R & B
Religious Music	Rel Musc
Religious Talk	Rel Talk
Rock	Rock
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock	Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R & B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes.

- DVDEnter-When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped).

- DISCPlay/Pause-You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

- DVDPlayOptions-Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:

• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped).

188UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

- Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).

NOTE:

• The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc.
• These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
• VES™Power-Allows you to turn VES™ ON and OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if equipped).

• VESTMCH1/CH2-Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

• SetHomeClock-Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.

• PlayerDefaults-Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference.

MenuLanguage—IfEquipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select "other." Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

AudioLanguage—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting "other." Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

SubtitleLanguage—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting "other." Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitles—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On.

AudioDRC—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to "High," and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is "Normal."

AspectRatio—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay—IfEquipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after

190UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings.

AMandFMButtons

Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

SETButton—ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

OperationInstructions-(DISCMODEforCDand MP3/WMAAudioPlay,DVD-VIDEO)

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times.

CAUTION!

Theradiomayshutdownduringextremelyhot conditions. Whenthisoccurs, theradiowillindicate "DiscHot" and shutofffuntilasafetemperature is reached. This shutdownisnecessarytoprotectthe opticsoftheDVDplayerandotherradiointernal components.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

LOADButton—LoadingCompactDisc(s)

Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays "INSERT DISC," insert the CD into the player.

Radio display will show "LOADING DISC" when the disc is loading and "READING DISC" when the radio is reading the disc.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12cm) disc only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.

192UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

EjectButton—EjectingCompactDisc(s)

Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show "EJECTING DISC" when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

SEEKButton(CDMODE)

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3/MWA modes.

SCANButton(CDMODE)

Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing.

TIMEButton(CDMODE)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF(CDMODE)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner.

AMorFMButton(CDMODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

NotesOnPlayingMP3/WMAFiles

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/WMA files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

194UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/WMA tracks on that disc.

SupportedMP3/WMAFileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48

WMA Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48		48, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3/WMAFiles

When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LISTButton(DISCModeforMP3/WMAPlay)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFOButton(DISCModeforMP3/WMAPlay)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file.

196UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

SEEKButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

SCANButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

EJECTButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds.

RW/FF(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

SETButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

OperatingInstructions—VoiceCommandSystem (IfEquipped)

For the radio, Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Refer to the Uconnect ^™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Multimedia (SatelliteRadio)(IfEquipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions-VideoEntertainment System(VES) ^™ (IfEquipped)

Refer to "Video Entertainment System (VES) ^™ " in the Uconnect ^™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Dolby®

Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories. "Dolby®" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

198UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

DTS^TM

"DTSTM" and "DTSTM 2.0" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

MEDIACENTER730N/430(RER/REN/RBZ)—AM/FMSTEREORADIOANDCD/DVD/HDD/NAV—IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit's faceplate.

The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System (GPS)-based Navigation system.

Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

OperatingInstructions—VoiceCommand System—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions—Uconnect™Phone—If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

ClockSettingProcedure—RBZRadio

ToManuallySettheClock

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

1. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
2. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
3. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

ChangingDaylightSavingsTime

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are displayed to change the current setting.

ShowTimeifRadioisOff

When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off." Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is Off" are displayed to change the current setting.

200UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ChangingtheTimeZone

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

ClockSettingProcedure—RER/RENRadio

Uconnect ^® gps—REROnly

The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system's clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set.

ToManuallySettheClock—RER/REN

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is

displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.

1. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

ChangingDaylightSavingsTime

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are displayed to change the current setting.

ShowTimeifRadioisOff

When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off." Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is Off" are displayed to change the current setting.

ChangingtheTimeZone

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

202UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed, the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen.
3. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
4. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

MEDIACENTER130(RES)—AM/FMSTEREO RADIOWITHCDPLAYER(MP3AUXJACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042305232

MediaCenter130(RES)

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

204UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FMButton

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

OperationInstructions—CDMODEForCDAndMP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

206UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4-3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• RESisasingleCDplayer.Donotattempttoinsert asecondCDifoneisalreadyloaded.
• Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andthey cancausedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

208UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

NotesonPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
- Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
- Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).

MEDIACENTER130(RES/RSC)—AM/FM STEREORADIOWITHCDPLAYER(MP3AUX JACK)ANDSIRIUSRADIO

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042305233

MediaCenter130(RES/RSC)

UNDERSTANDING YOURINSTRUMENT PANEL211

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

212UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

VoiceCommandSystem(Radio)—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

VoiceCommandButtonUconnect™Phone—If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.

PhoneButtonUconnect™Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

214UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music	Rel Musc
Religious Talk	Rel Talk
Rock	Rock
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock	Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R&B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

- SetClock—Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust

the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUXButton

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

OperationInstructions—CDMODEforCDand MP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• RESisasingleCDplayer.Donotattempttoinsert asecondCDifoneisalreadyloaded.
• Dual-mediadistypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andthey cancausedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

NotesOnPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

220UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

- Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

- Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

222UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

LISTButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFOButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Multimedia (SatelliteRadio)(IfEquipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Uconnect™Multimedia(SATELLITERADIO)—IF EQUIPPED(REN/REQ/RER/RBZ/RESRADIOS ONLY)

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further

224UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccessWithREQ/RESRadios

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SIDAccessWithREN/RER/RBZRadios

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

SelectingUconnect™Multimedia(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Multimedia (Satellite)Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

226UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INFOButton

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

SETButton-ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

228UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

REMOTESOUNDSYSTEMCONTROLS—IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. The left and right controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches.

Close-up of a car steering wheel with two black arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

RemoteSoundSystemControls (BackViewOfSteeringWheel)

045003761

Right-HandSwitchFunctions

• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

Left-HandSwitchFunctionsforRadioOperation

• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed.

Left-HandSwitchFunctionsforMedia(i.e., CD) Operation

• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.
• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track, three times to listen to the third track, and so forth.

- Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed.

CD/DVDDISCMAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

230UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIOOPERATIONANDCELLULARPHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATECONTROLS

The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.

ManualHeatingandAirConditioning

045607574

Manual Temperature Control

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

BlowerControl

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the "O" (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position.

TemperatureControl

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

232UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ModeControl(AirDirection)

045607541

Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.

Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets.

Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiblower and temperature settings for best wind- and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

RecirculationControl

Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation

will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off.

NOTE:

• Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.

234UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash several times then go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically is these modes are selected.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

• MAXA/C

For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time.

• ECONOMYMODE

If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

AirConditioningControl

Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

AutomaticTemperatureControl(ATC)—IfEquipped

045607534

AutomaticTemperatureControl

AutomaticOperation

The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

Operation of the system is quite simple.

1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.

045607537

1. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air

conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the "O" (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.

72^(22^) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.

236UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation.
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.

BlowerControl

045607536

For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position. In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected. In off position the blower will shut off.

ManualOperation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).

NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details.

Automatic Temperature Control Operation		The system will...
Operation	How	Blower Control	Mode Control	Air Temperature Control	Air Recirculation Control	A/C Operation
Full Automatic Operation	Set blower knob to Auto. Set mode knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time.	Automatic
Blower Preferred Automatic	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto. Set mode knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time.	Automatic
Mode Preferred Automatic	Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Set blower knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	Automatic	User selectable to any air delivery point.	Automatic	User selectable outside or recirculated.	User selectable A/C on or off.
Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto. Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	User selectable to any air delivery point.	Automatic	User selectable outside or recirculated.	User selectable A/C on or off.

238UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.

- Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

- Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

- Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets.

- Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

- Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

• AirConditionerControl

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.

• RecirculationControl

The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.

NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode in order to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.

- Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or Mix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.

- Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the Recirculation button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.

OperatingTips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

SummerOperation

The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

WinterOperation

Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

VacationStorage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

WindowFogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur.

SideWindowDemisters

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors.

OutsideAirIntake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

A/CAirFilter—IfEquipped

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals.

242UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ControlSettingSuggestionsforVariousWeatherConditions

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
HOT WEATHERAND VEHICLE INTERIOR ISVERY HOT	Open the windows, start the vehicle, press thebutton to turn recirculate off.Set the Fan control to the high position (full clockwise). Press the A/C button.Set the Mode control at or betweenand. Set the temperature control to full cool. After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press thebutton to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows. Once you are comfortable, press thebutton to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort.
WARM WEATHER(WZCW)[A3XT]	Press thebutton to turn recirculate off.If it's sunny, set the Mode control at or nearand turn the air conditioning on. If it's cloudy or dark, set the Mode control at or near.
COOL OR COLDHIMID CONDITIONS[HZTW]	Press thebutton to turn recirculate off.If it's sunny, set the Mode control at or betweenandthen turn the air conditioning on. If it's cloudy or dark, set the Mode control at or nearand turn the air conditioning on. If the windows begin to fog, set Mode control at or betweenand.
COLD DRYCON	Set the Mode control at or near. If it is sunny, you may want more upper air. In this case, set the Mode control at or betweenand.In very cold weather, if you need extra heat at the windshield, set the Mode control at or near the.

□Automatic Transmission....247

□Normal Starting 247

☐Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20^ F Or -29^ C) 248

□If Engine Fails To Start 248

□After Starting 249

■Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ..... 2 5 0

■Automatic Transmission.... 250

□Key Ignition Park Interlock....252

□Brake/Transmission Interlock System ..... 2 5 2

□Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System 253

☐Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic Transmission 253

□Gear Ranges 254

■ AutoStick® — If Equipped 258

□Operation 258

□ General Information 259

STARTING ANDOPERATING

■Driving On Slippery Surfaces 260

□Acceleration 260

□Traction 260

■Driving Through Water 261

□Flowing/Rising Water 261

□Shallow Standing Water.... 261

■Power Steering 263

□Power Steering Fluid Check.... 2 6 4

■Parking Brake 264

■Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 267

Electronic Brake Control System 269

□Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 269

□Traction Control System (TCS) 270

□Brake Assist System (BAS) 270

□Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped . . . . . . 271

□ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 273

■ Tire Safety Information 277

□Tire Markings....277

□Tire Identification Number (TIN) 280

□Tire Terminology And Definitions.... 281

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 282

■ Tires — General Information 286

□Tire Pressure 286

□Tire Inflation Pressures 287

□ Radial-Ply Tires 289

□Compact Spare Tire 289

□Vehicle Certification Label....316
□Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ..... 3 1 6
□Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)....317

□Overloading 317
□Loading 317

■ Trailer Towing 318

□Common Towing Definitions....318
□Trailer Hitch Classification.... 3 1 9
□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) 321
□Trailer And Tongue Weight.... 3 2 2
□Towing Requirements 323
□Towing Tips 327

■ Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) .. 328

☐Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) 328

STARTINGPROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving childreninavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Donotleavethekeysinthe ignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

AutomaticTransmission

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position, and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK.

NormalStarting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

ForvehiclesnotequippedwithTipStart(Four-Speed Transmission),turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

ForvehiclesequippedwithTipStart(Six-SpeedTransmission),turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter

motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

ExtremeColdWeather(Below-20°For-29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended.

IfEngineFailsToStart

WARNING!

- Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsinto thethrottlebodyairinletopeninginanattemptto startthevehicle. Thiscouldresultinaflashfire causingseriouspersonalinjury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletoget itstarted.Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatic transmissioncannotbestartedthisway.Unburned fuelcouldenterthecatalyticconverterandonce theenginehasstarted,igniteanddamagethe converterandvehicle.Ifthevehiclehasadischargedbattery,boostercablesmaybeusedto obtainastartfromaboosterbatteryorthebattery inanothervehicle.Thistypeofstartcanbedangerousifdoneimproperly.Referto"JumpStarting"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies"forfurther information.

WithoutTipStart

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all

the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcrank the engine form more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures.

WithTipStart

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, wait10to15secondsbeforetryingagain.

AfterStarting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver's side of the vehicle.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnectthecordbeforedriving. Damagetothe110-115Voltelectricalcordcouldcause electrocution.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• ShifttheshiftleverintoPARKonlyafterthe vehiclehascometoacompletestop.
• ShifttheshiftleverintooroutofREVERSEonly afterthevehiclehascometoacompletestopand theengineisatidlespeed.
• DonotshifttheshiftleverfromREVERSE,PARK, orNEUTRALintoanyforwardgearwhenthe engineisaboveidlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingtheshiftleverintoanygear, make sureyourfootisfirmlyonthebrakepedal.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a circular dial and key inserted (no text or symbols visible)

ShiftLever
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting the shift lever out of PARK.

WARNING!

- ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARK orNEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthan idlespeed.Ifyourfootisnotfirmlyonthebrake pedal,thevehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforward orinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicle andhitsomeoneorsomething.Onlyshiftinto gearwhentheengineisidlingnormallyandwhen yourrightfootisfirmlyonthebrakepedal.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinandnearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,youshould alwaysshiftthevehicleintoPARK,removethe keyfromtheignition,andapplytheparking brake.Oncethekeyisremovedfromtheignition, theshiftleverislockedinthePARKposition, securingthevehicleagainstunwantedmovement. Furthermore,youshouldneverleavechildrenunattendedinsideavehicle.

KeyIgnitionParkInterlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.

Brake/TransmissionInterlockSystem

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transmission will not shift out of PARK. Battery power is required to release the Brake/Transmission Interlock system. However, an override system allows you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power. To activate the override system:

• Firmly apply the parking brake.

• Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and rotate it to the ON position.
• Remove the cup holder liner.
• Insert a key, screwdriver, or finger into the hole at the front of the cup holder and push and hold the manual override release lever forward.
• While holding the release lever forward, move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL.
• Release the manual override.

NOTE: If this occurs, even if the override is successful, it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

AutomaticTransmissionIgnitionInterlockSystem

This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON position, and the brake pedal is applied.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

Four-Speed/Six-SpeedAutomaticTransmission

The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles/kilometers.

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.

When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever into the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstitutefor theparkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparking brakefullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Donotleavethe ignitionkeyintheignitionswitch.Achildcould operatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormove thevehicle.

CAUTION!

DONOTracetheenginewhenshiftingfromPARK orNEUTRALpositionsintoanothergearrangeas thiscandamagethedrivetrain.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL

This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitionswitchtocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveanaccident.

DRIVE-Six-SpeedTransmission

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts, and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick® mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range. For example: When operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions, reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick® will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.

DRIVE-Four-SpeedTransmission

This range should be used for most city and highway driving, it provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts, and best fuel economy. However, select the "3" range when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle

under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions, using the "3" range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with AutoStick®, you can reduce the frequency of transmission shifting during heavy loading, hilly terrain, strong headwinds, or while towing. Under these conditions, selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick® will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.

DRIVE3—Four-SpeedTransmission

This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear. Shifts into third gear may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds. The "3" range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress

NOTE: Using the "3" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.

LOW—Four-SpeedTransmission

This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections.

If the transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override DRIVE(OVERDRIVE) and [5] for six-speed AutoStick® transmission and [3] for four-speed transmission, range by changingshift points. This is donetoprevent transmission damaged due to over-heating.

ResetMode-ElectronicTransmission

The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear (third gear for six-speed). The transmission remains in second gear (third gear for six-speed) despite

the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-TRAL will continue to operate. The Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the shift lever into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
5. Shift the shift lever into the desired gear range and resume driving.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is required.

AUTOSTICK®—IFEQUIPPED

AutoStick ^® is a driver-interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control of the vehicle. AutoStick ^® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Operation

By placing the shift lever one shift-level below the DRIVE position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.

Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.

NOTE: In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right (+) or left (-).

AutoStick ^® is deactivated when the shift lever is moved from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE position.

• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• If a ratio other than first is selected, and the vehicle is brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick® is engaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick® is engaged.

• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit, the transmission will automatically select the next higher ratio.

• If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine. Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio, however:

• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.

• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.

DRIVINGONSLIPPERYSURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapidaccelerationonslipperysurfacesisdangerous. Unequaltractioncancausesuddenpullingofthe frontwheels.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicle andpossiblyhaveanaccident.Accelerateslowlyand carefullywheneverthereislikelytobepoortraction (ice,snow,wet,mud,loosesand,etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

DRIVINGTHROUGHWATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/RisingWater

WARNING!

Donotdriveonoracrossaroadorpathwherewater isflowingand/orrising(asinstormrun-off).Flowingwatercanwearawaytheroadorpath'ssurface andcauseyourvehicletosinkintodeeperwater. Furthermore,flowingand/orrisingwatercancarry yourvehicleawaysswiftly.Failuretofollowthis warningmayresultininjuriesthatareseriousor fataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

ShallowStandingWater

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so.

CAUTION!

• Alwayscheckthedepthofthestandingwater beforedrivingthroughit.Neverdrivethrough standingwaterthatisdeeperthanthebottomof thetirerimsmountedonthevehicle.
• Determinetheconditionoftheroadorthepath thatisunderwaterandifthereareanyobstaclesin thewaybeforedrivingthroughthestandingwater.
• Donotexceed5mph(8km/h)whendriving throughstandingwater.Thiswillminimizewave effects.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Drivingthroughstandingwatermaycausedamagetoyourvehicle'sdrivetraincomponents.Alwaysinspectyourvehicle'sfluids(i.e.,engineoil, transmission,axle,etc.)forsignsofcontamination (i.e.,fluidthatismilkyorfoamyinappearance) afterdrivingthroughstandingwater.Donotcontinuetooperatethevehicleifanyfluidappears contaminated,asthismayresultinfurtherdamage.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.
• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout,andcauseserious internaldamagetotheengine.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'stractioncapabilities.Donotexceed5mph (8km/h)whendrivingthroughstandingwater.
• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'sbrakingcapabilities,whichincreasesstoppingdistances.Therefore,afterdrivingthroughstandingwater,driveslowlyandlightlypressonthebrakepedalseveraltimestodrythebrakes.
• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout, andleaveyou stranded.
• Failuretofollowthesewarningsmayresultin injuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,your passengers,andothersaroundyou.

POWERSTEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continuedoperationwithreducedpowersteering assistcouldposeasafetyrisktoyourselfandothers. Serviceshouldbeobtainedassoonaspossible.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Do notoverfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommended powersteeringfluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

PARKINGBRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Interior view of a car's car showing the intake manifold and keyway (no text or symbols visible)

ParkingBrake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstitutefor theparkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparking brakefullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinvehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninvehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.
• Donotleavethekeyintheignition.Achildcould operatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormove thevehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandanaccident.
• Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicleoritmayrollandcausedamageor injury. Also, becertaintoleavethetransmission in PARK. Failuretodosomaycausethevehicletorollandcausedamageorinjury.

CAUTION!

If the "BrakeWarningLight" remains on with the parkingbrakereleased, abrakesystemmalfunction is indicated. Havethebrakesystemserviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

(Continued)

ANTI-LOCKBRAKESYSTEM(ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

WARNING!

- Pumpingoftheanti-lockbrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoanaccident. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneed toslowdownorstop.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• TheABScannotpreventthenaturallawsofphysicsfromactingonthevehicle,norcanitincrease brakingorsteeringefficiencybeyondthataffordedbytheconditionofthevehiclebrakesand tiresorthetractionafforded.
• TheABScannotpreventaccidents,including thoseresultingfromexcessivespeedinturns, followinganothervehicletooclosely,orhydroplaning.Onlyasafe,attentive,andskillfuldriver canpreventaccidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.

If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the "Brake Warning Light" and the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake

(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. See your authorized dealer.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.

You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock:

- The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop),

• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
- brake pedal pulsations,
- and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronicequipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radiotransmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

ELECTRONICBRAKECONTROLSYSTEM

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.

Anti-LockBrakeSystem(ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and

help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to "Anti-Lock Brake System" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

TractionControlSystem(TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the "Partial Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section of this manual.

BrakeAssistSystem(BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent then natural law so physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speedinturns, following another vehicle to closely, or hydroplaning. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

HillStartAssist(HSA)-IfEquipped

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied.

During operation, HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped
• Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
- Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhills(i.e.,lessthan 7%),withaloadedvehicleorwhilepullingatraler wherethesystemwillnotactivateandslightrolling mayoccur,whichcouldcauseacollisionwithanothervehicolorobject.Alwaysrememberthedriver isresponsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.

The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears, and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL.

HSAOff

Non-EVICEquippedVehicles

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this procedure:

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds.

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).

1. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Release the clutch pedal.
5. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
6. Press the "ESC Off" switch four times within 20 seconds. The "ESC Off Indicator Light" should turn on and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half-turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it's previous setting.

EVICEquippedVehicles

HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual

path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition

• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

ESCOffIndicatorLight

The "ESC Off Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Off Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Off Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• TheElectronicStabilityControl(ESC) cannot preventthenaturallawsofphysicsfromactingonthe vehicle,norcanitinincreasethetractionaffordedby prevailingroadconditions.
• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• ThecapabilitiesofanESC-equippedvehiclemust neverbeexploitedinarecklessordangerous manner,whichcouldjeopardizetheuser'ssafety orthesafetyofothers.

ESCMalfunctionIndicatorLight

The "ESC Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

- The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

ESCOperatingModes

All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes:

ESCON

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below.

PartialESCMode

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch (located in the lower switch bank below the heater/air conditioning controls). When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip

feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally, with the exception of engine power reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.

WARNING!

InthePartialESCmode,theenginetorquereduction andstabilityfeaturesaredesensitized.Therefore,the enhancedvehiclestabilityofferedbyESCisunavailable.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by pressing the "ESC Off" switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

TIRESAFETYINFORMATION

TireMarkings

054903773

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description

6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

- High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

SizeDesignation:

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank....." = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT= Temporary spare tire31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65= Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code—"R"means radial construction—"D"means diagonal or bias construction

15= Rim diameter in inches (in)

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

"....blank..." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

ExtraLoad(XL)= Extra load (or reinforced) tire

LightLoad= Light load tire

C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—03 means the 3rd week.

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

TireTerminologyandDefinitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running from the sill to the roof.
ColdTirePressureCold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or KPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedInflationPressureVehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure.

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar.

TirePlacardLocation

TireandLoadingInformationPlacard

811b5a9a

TireandLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsforDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 - 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).

1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
2. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Occupants			Combined weight ofoccupants cargofrom Tireard	MINUS	Combined Occupant'sweight	=	AVAILABLECargTr
TOTAL	FRONT	REAR
EXAMPLE 1					Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 130 lbsOccupant 3: 160 lbsOccupant 4: 100 lbsOccupant 5: 80 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs
5	2	3
							195 lbs
EXAMPLE 2
3	2	1
							325 lbs
EXAMPLE 3
2	2	0			Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 200 lbsTOTAL WEIGHT: 400 lbs
			865 lbs	minus	400 lbs	=	465 lbs

811a4d11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tiresis dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES—GENERALINFORMATION

TirePressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causeaccidents.
• Under-inflationincreasestireflexingandcanresultinover-heatingandtirefailure.
• Over-inflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultintirefailure.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldlosecontrolofyourvehicle.
• Over-inflatedorunder-inflatedtirescanaffect vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly, resulting inlossofvehiclecontrol.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicletotheothercancausethevehicletodrifttotherightorleft.
• Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

RideComfortandVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

TireInflationPressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information” section of this manual.

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

TirePressuresforHighSpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaxi- mumloadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyour tirescouldcausethemtofail.Youcouldhavea seriousaccident.Donotdrivevehicleloadedtothe maximumcapacityatcontinuousspeedsabove 75mph(120km/h).

Radial-PlyTires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseanaccident.Alwaysuseradialplytiresinsetsoffour.Never combinethemwithothertypesoftires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

CompactSpareTire

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Temporaryusesparetiresareforemergencyuseonly. Withthesetires,donotdrivemorethan50mph (80km/h).Temporary-usesparetireshavelimited treadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothetreadwear indicators,thetemporaryusesparetireneedstobe replaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings,which applytoyourspare.Failureretodosocouldresultin sparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Prolongeduseoflimitedusespare,oranincorrect tiresizeoneitherfrontwheel,maydamagetransmissiondifferentialandresultinlossofvehiclemobility.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

TireSpinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speeds may cause a damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and donot let any onear aspinning wheel, nomatter what the speed.

TreadWearIndicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Two views of a car tire showing tread pattern and edge details (no text or symbols)

055007576

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

WARNING!

Tiresandsparetireshouldbereplacedaftersixyears, regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureretofollow thiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure.You couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccidentresultingin seriousinjuryordeath.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

ReplacementTires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicators"). Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentensize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

(Continued)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damagetothevehiclemayresultiftirechainsare used.

SNOWTIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if

desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is shown in the following diagram.

graph TD
    A["Vehicle Icon"] --> B["Vehicle Icon"]
    B --> C["Vehicle Icon"]
    C --> D["Vehicle Icon"]
    D --> E["Vehicle Icon"]
    E --> F["Vehicle Icon"]
    F --> G["Vehicle Icon"]
    G --> H["Vehicle Icon"]
    H --> I["Vehicle Icon"]
    I --> J["Vehicle Icon"]
    J --> K["Vehicle Icon"]
    K --> L["Vehicle Icon"]
    L --> M["Vehicle Icon"]
    M --> N["Vehicle Icon"]
    N --> O["Vehicle Icon"]
    O --> P["Vehicle Icon"]
    P --> Q["Vehicle Icon"]
    Q --> R["Vehicle Icon"]
    R --> S["Vehicle Icon"]
    S --> T["Vehicle Icon"]
    T --> U["Vehicle Icon"]
    U --> V["Vehicle Icon"]
    V --> W["Vehicle Icon"]
    W --> X["Vehicle Icon"]
    X --> Y["Vehicle Icon"]
    Y --> Z["Vehicle Icon"]

TireRotation

055707139

TIREPRESSUREMONITORSYSTEM(TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

296STARTING AND OPERATING

The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 F (20 C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20 F (-7 C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (157 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystem operationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesame size,type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscan causesensordamage.Donotuseaftermarkettire sealantsorbalancebeadsifyourvehicleis equippedwithaTPMS,asdamagetothesensors mayresult.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure, alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswill preventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalve stem,whichcoulddamagetheTirePressureMonitoringSensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light."

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

BaseSystem

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
  • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

CheckTPMSWarning

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE:

1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

1. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

PremiumSystem-IfEquipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
  • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

81826bed

When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a "CHECK TPM SYSTEM" message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, and the "CHECK TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the "TPM Telltale Light" will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a "CHECK TPM SYSTEM" message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a "CHECK TPM SYSTEM" message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:

United States. K R 5 S 1 2 0 1

Canada 2671-S120123

FUELREQUIREMENTS

2.4Land2.7LEngine

All engines are designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

3.5LEngine

The 3.5L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane

for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline."

Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/OxygenateBlends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the

winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Forvehiclesequippedwitha2.4Lor3.5Lengine,DO NOTusegasolinecontainingMethanolorE85Ethanol.Useoftheseblendsmayresultinstartingand driveabilityproblemsandmaydamagecriticalfuel systemcomponents.

NOTE: The 2.7Lengineis now rated for E85 Ethanol use (EXCEPTCALIFORNIAEMISSIONSTATES). Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. Refer to "Flexible Fuel" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the

manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

E-85UsageInNon-FlexFuelVehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode
- OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
- increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
  • change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMTinGasoline

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.

It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.

MaterialsAddedtoFuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

FuelSystemCautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

• TheuseofleadedgasisprohibitedbyFederallaw. Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissioncontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or somelights smoke, you're in e may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Theuseoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentration of methanol. Fuelsystem damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

(Continued)

CarbonMonoxideWarnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Followtheprecautionsbelowtopreventcarbon monoxidepoisoning:

- Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithproper maintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspected everytimethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormalconditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired, drivewithallsidewindowsfullyopen.
• Keepthetrunkclosedwhendrivingyourvehicle topreventcarbonmonoxideandotherpoisonous exhaustgasesfromenteringthevehicle.

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol(E85)orUnleadedGasolineOnly. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.

NOTE: The 2.7Lengineis now rated for E85 Ethanol use (EXCEPTCALIFORNIAEMISSIONSTATES). Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can operate on E85.

E85FuelCap

CAUTION!

OnlyvehicleswiththeE85fuelfillerdoorlabelcan operateonE85.

81ae46a9

E85Badge

EthanolFuel(E85)

E85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanolvaporsareextremelyflammableandcould causeseriouspersonalinjury.Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthevehiclewhenremovingthefuelfillertubecap(gascap)orfillingthe tank.DonotuseE85asacleaningagentandnever useitnearanopenflame.

FuelRequirements

If your vehicle is E85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E85 fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.

Forbestresults, are fueling pattern that avoids alternating between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:

• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km)

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.

NOTE:

• Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E85 fuel, you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be

caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR ^® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.

SelectionOfEngineOilForFlexibleFuelVehicles (E85)andGasolineVehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Starting

The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0^ F ( -18^ C). In the range of 0^ F ( -18^ C) to 32^ F ( 0^ C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32^ F ( 0^ C).

CruisingRange

Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

ReplacementParts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION!

Replacingfuelsystemcomponentswithnon-ethanol compatiblecomponentscandamageyourvehicle.

Maintenance

If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel, follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual.

CAUTION!

Donotuseethanolmixturegreaterthan85%inyour vehicle.Itwillcausedifficultyincoldstartingand mayaffectdriveability.

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

Diagram of a car interior showing internal components and a valve mechanism (no text or symbols)

FuelFillerDoor

After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle's surface.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve or connector with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

TetherCable

NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Damagethefuelsystemoremissioncontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillertubecap(gascap).
• Apoorlyfittinggascapmaycausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toturnon.
• Toavoidfuelspillageandoverfilling, donot "top off" thefueltankafterfilling. Whenthefuel nozzle "clicks" orshutsoff, thefueltankisfull.

WARNING!

- Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornear thevehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthe tankfilled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neveraddfuelwhentheengineisrunning. This is inviolationofmoststateandfederalfireregulationsanddoingsowillcausetheMILtoturnon.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontaineron thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

LooseFillerCapMessage

If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

VEHICLELOADING

VehicleCertificationLabel

Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver's door.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
- Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that yououdonot exceed them a maximum front or rear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

TRAILERTOWING

In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section, please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.

CommonTowingDefinitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

TrailerTongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

TrailerHitchClassification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.

TrailerHitchClassificationDefinitions
ClassMax.TrailerHitchIndustryStandards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty	3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TrailerTowingWeights(MaximumTrailerWeightRatings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

MaximumTrailerWeightRatings
Engine/TransmissionMax.FrontalArea	Max.GTW(GrossTrailerWt.)	Max.TrailerTongueWt.(SeeNote1)
2.4L/Auto See Note 2 Not R	recommended Not Recommended
2.7L/Auto See Note 2 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
3.5L/Auto 22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note1:Thetrailertongueweightmustbeconsideredaspartofthecombinedweightofoccupantsand cargo,anditshouldneverexceedtheweightreferencedontheTireandLoadingInformationplacard.Refer to“TireSafetyInformation”in“StartingandOperating”forfurtherinformation.
Note2:Enclosedtrailersoropenutilitytrailerswithfrontshields/guardsarenotrecommendedforusewith all4cylinderand2.7Lengineswithautomatictransmission.Pleaseeseeyourauthorizeddealerforadditional information.

TrailerandTongueWeight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in "Tire Safety Information" in this section for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Incorrecttrailertongueweightcouldresultinin-creasedyaworvehicleinstability.Anegativetrailer tongueweightcouldunloadtherearsuspensionof thetowvehicledecreasingvehiclestability.Negative trailertongueweightcouldcausethetrailertosquat andpotentiallybecomedisengagedfromthetow vehicleresultinginarunawaytrailercondition.

TowingRequirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

• Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine, axleorotherpartscouldbedamaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This help the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in the heavier loads.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoaninjuryaccident. Followtheseguidelinestomakeyourtrailertowing assafeaspossible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shift can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could close to your vehicle and have an accident.
• Whenhaulingcargo,ortowingatrailer,donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer.Overloadingcan causealossofcontrol,poorperformance,ordamagetobrakes,axle,engine,transmission,steering, suspension,chassisstructure,ortires.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto theframeorhookretainersofthevehiclehitch. Crossthechainsunderthetrailertongueand allowenoughslackforturningcorners.
• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade. Whenparking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, blockor "chock" the trailer wheels.
  • GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:

1.GVWR

2.GTW

(Continued)

1. Trailertongueweighitratingforthetrailerhitch utilized(Thisrequirementmaylimittheability to alwaysachieve10%oftrailertongueweightasa percentageoftotaltrailerweight).

TowingRequirements-Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements–TrailerBrakes

- Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (450 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakelining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavean accident.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance.Whentowing,youshouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failurertodosocouldresult inanaccident.

TowingRequirements-TrailerLightsandWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

TowingTips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly – including hazard flashers.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, third gear for a four-speed automatic and the fifth gear for a six-speed AutoStick® should be selected.

NOTE: Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission fluid level before towing. The AutoStick® six-speed transmission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked. See your authorized dealership service center for assistance.

ElectronicSpeedControl-IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

- Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

- CityDriving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

• HighwayDriving Reduce speed.

• AirConditioning Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

TowingThisVehicleBehindAnotherVehicle(Flat towingwithallfourwheelsontheground)

CAUTION!

DONOTflattowthisvehicle.Damagetothedrive-trainwillresult.

NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■Hazard Warning Flasher.... 3 3 0

■If Your Engine Overheats.... 3 3 0

☐Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only (If Equipped) 3 3 1

■Jacking And Tire Changing.... 3 3 2

□Preparations For Jacking.... 3 3 2

□Jack Location.... 3 3 3

□Spare Tire Stowage 3 3 3

□Jacking Instructions 334

■Jump-Starting 339

□Preparations For Jump-Start ..... 3 3 9

□Jump-Starting Procedure.... 341

■ Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 342

■ Towing A Disabled Vehicle 344

□ With The Ignition Key 344

□ Without The Ignition Key 345

330WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel, below the radio.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery.

IFYOURENGINEOVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.IfthepointerrisestotheH(red)mark, theinstrumentclusterwillsoundachime.When safe,pulloverandstopthevehiclewiththeengineat idle.Turnofftheairconditioningandwaituntilthe pointeddropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthe pointerremainsontheH(red)markformorethana minute,turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallfor service.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhetheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

EngineOilOverheating—2.4LEngineOnly(If Equipped)

During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on hot day, the engine oil temperature may become too hot. If this happens, the "HOTOIL" message flashes, the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced.

NOTE: Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) at the maximum. You may of course, reduce your speed further if needed.

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Gettingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. Thevehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. Youcouldbecrushed.Nevergetanypartofyour bodyundervehiclethatisonajack.Neverstart orruntheenginewhilethevehicleisonajack.If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle,takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Thejackisdesignedtouseasatoolforchanging tiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedtoliftthe vehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicleshould bejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly.Avoidiceor slipperyareas.

PreparationsForJacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

1. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackLocation

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk.

SpareTireStowage

The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES333

SpareTireRemoval

Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular head and internal brackets, no visible text or symbols

SpareTireandJackStowage

JackingInstructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of receiving warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfrom theedgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraising thevehicle.
• Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
• Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedand forliftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.
• Ifworkingonorneararoadway, beextremely carefulofmotortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingtheground.
  • TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.

(Continued)

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES335

JackWarningLabel

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.

NOTE:The Jack Handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with two parts, one being folded and the other holding a tool (no text or symbols present)

RemovingJackHandleFromJack

819b068d

1. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

336WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with two mechanical arms (no text or symbols)

JackingLocations

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackington locationsotherthanthoseindicatedinStep3.

1. There is one front jacking location and one rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle. The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body.

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.

1. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack

head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackand hurtsomeonearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenough toremovethetire.

1. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
2. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel covers (if equipped) off the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts

338WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharpedges.

NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, the wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel cover onto the wheel, and then install the wheel nuts.

1. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
2. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts, until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft. lbs (135 N. m). If you doubt that you have

tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.

1. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tire repairedorreplacedimmediately.

1. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, havethe tirerepairedorreplacedassoonaspossible.
2. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required.

JUMP-STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

WARNING!

Donotattemptjump-startingifthebatteryisfrozen. Itcouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

PreparationsforJump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.

RemoteBatteryPosts

1 — Remote Positive (+)Post(coveredwithprotectivecap)
2 — Remote Negative (-)Post

340WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.Itcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchison.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.
- Removeanymetaljewelrysuchaswatchbandsor braceletsthatmightmakeaninadvertentelectrical contact.Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.
- Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+)battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover.

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with hoses and connectors (no visible text or symbols)

LockingTab

1. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES341

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-StartingProcedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damaged by battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to the remote negative (-)post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthecabletothenegativepost(-)ofthe dischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalspark couldcausethebatterytoexplodeandcouldresultin personalinjury.

342WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

1. Disconnect the negative (-)jumper cable from the remote negative (-)post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the remote positive (+)post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+)battery post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-VERSE and FIRST gear. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF before attempting to "rock" the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

CAUTION!

- When "rocking" astuckvehiclebymovingbetween1standREVERSE, donotspinthewheels fasterthan15mph(24km/h), ordrivetraindamage mayresult.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure. Itcanalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthe wheelsabove30mph(48km/h)whileingear(no transmissionshiftingoccurring).

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheels speeds may caused damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and donot let any on near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

344WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

TOWINGADISABLEDVEHICLE

WithThelgnitionKey

Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:

• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION!

- Exceedingthesetowinglimitsmaycauseatransaxlefailure.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Ifthetransaxleisnotoperative,orifthevehicleis tobetowedmorethan15miles(25km),the vehiclemustbetransportedeitherwithaflatbed truck(allfourwheelsofftheground)orwiththe frontwheelsofftheground,otherwisedamageto thetransmissionmayoccur.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in the LOCK or ACC position.
• Donotattempttotowthisvehiclefromthefront withsling-typetowingequipment.Damagetothe frontfasciawillresult.
• Donotpushortowthisvehiclewithanother vehicleasdamagetothebumperfasciaandtransaxlemayresult.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the key must be in the ON position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.

WithoutThelgnitionKey

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flat bed towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used. Furthermore, rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be used. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Engine Compartment — 2.4L ..... 3 4 9
■Engine Compartment — 2.7L ..... 3 5 0
■Engine Compartment — 3.5L....351
■Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ..... 3 5 2 □Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ..... 3 5 2
■Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 353
■Replacement Parts 354
■Dealer Service 354

■Maintenance Procedures....355

□Engine Oil 356
□Engine Oil Filter 359
□Engine Air Cleaner Filter 360
□Maintenance-Free Battery 360
□Air Conditioner Maintenance....362
□A/C Air Filter – If Equipped ..... 3 6 3
□Body Lubrication.... 364
□Windshield Wiper Blades 365

348MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

□Adding Washer Fluid 366

□Exhaust System 366

□Cooling System 369

□Brake System 374

□Automatic Transmission.... 376

□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion.... 379

□Cleaning Center Console Cupholders ..... 3 8 4

□Convertible Top Care.... 385

□Weather Strip Care – Soft And Hard Top . . . . 3 8 7

■Fuses 388

□Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 388

■Vehicle Storage 393

■Replacement Bulbs 394

■Bulb Replacement.... 394

□Headlamp 394

□Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp....396

□Front Fog Lamp 397

☐Tail/Stop, Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 398

□ License Plate Lamp 401

□ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) .. 402

■ Fluid Capacities 403

■ Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ..... 404

□Engine 404

□Chassis 405

ENGINECOMPARTMENT—2.4L

070305924

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Integrated Power Module 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 — Power Distribution Center

350MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

ENGINECOMPARTMENT—2.7L

070645925

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Four-Speed Only) 10 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module

ENGINECOMPARTMENT—3.5L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)

352MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEM—OBDII

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as maintaining engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist an authorized service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

- Prolongeddrivingwiththe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight"oncouldcausefurtherdamagetothe emissioncontrolsystem.Itcouldalsoaffectfuel economyanddriveability.Thevehiclemustbe servicedbeforeanyemissionstestscanbeperformed.

- Ifthe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight"isflashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediates service is required.

LooseFuelFillerCapMessage

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed. A "GASCAP" message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that

the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer "Reset" button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)." Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONSINSPECTIONANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

354MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

1. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENTPARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

DEALERSERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

- Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanauthorizedChryslerGroupLLC dealershiporqualifiedrepaircenter.

(Continued)

MAINTENANCEPROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceanddurabilityof yourvehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenance intervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthese componentsasthechemicalscandamageyour engine,transmission,powersteeringorairconditioning.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.Ifaflushisneeded becauseofcomponentmalfunction,useonlythe specifiedfluidfortheflushingprocedure.

EngineOil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.

CAUTION!

Donotoverfilltheengine. Overfillingtheengine will cause oilaeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage you are engine.

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

NOTE: Undernocircumstances should doil change intervalsexceed6,000 miles (10000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyoureengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)-2.4Land2.7L Engines

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)-3.5LEngine

SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

MaterialsAddedtoEngineOils

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it's performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

EngineOilFilter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

All of this manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

360MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

EngineAirCleanerFilter

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system(air cleaner,hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makes sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system(aircleaner, hoses,etc.) removed. Failure to dosocan result in serious personal injury.

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR ^® engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.

Maintenance-FreeBattery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to _Jump-Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield.

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluid tocontactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotlean overabatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacid splashesineyesoronskin,flushtheareaimmediatelywithlargeamountsofwater.
• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keep flameorsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuse aboosterbatteryoranyotherboostersourcewith anoutputgreaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcable clampstotoucheachother.
• Batteryposts,terminals,andrelatedaccessories containleadandleadcompounds.Washhands afterhandling.

CAUTION!

• Itisessentialwhenreplacingthecablesonthe batterythatthepositivecableisattachedtothe positivepostandthenegativecableisattachedto thenegativepost.Batterypostsaremarkedpositive(+)andnegative(-)andareidentifiedonthe batterycase.Cableclampsshouldbetightonthe terminalpostsandfreeofcorrosion.
• Ifa "fastcharger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the chargerto the battery. Do not use a "fastcharger" to provide starting voltage.

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancause thesystemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury, damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobedisconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.

A/CAirFilter-IfEquipped

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

WARNING!

DonotremovetheA/CAirFilterwhilethebloweris operatingorpersonalinjurymayresult.

The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door.
3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand. Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underneath the instrument panel if you release it.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.

364MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

1. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.

A/CAirFilterReplacement

1. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.

2. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

TheA/CAirFilterislabeledwithanarrowto indicateairflowdirectionthroughthefilter.Failure toinstallthefilterproperlywillresultintheneedto replaceitmoreoften.

1. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.

BodyLubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts

concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR ^® Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder.

WindshieldWiperBlades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade.

Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function.

366MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

AddingWasherFluid

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

ExhaustSystem

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbonmonoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/ExhaustGas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyoupark overmaterialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmight begrassorleavescomingintocontactwithyour exhaustsystem.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareaswhereyourexhaustsystemcan contactanythingthatcanburn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.
• Damagethecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition. Intheeventofenginemalfunction, particularly involvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossof performance, haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly. Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetheconverterand vehicle.

368MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

CoolingSystem

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthe hood,donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhas hadtimetocool.Nevertrytoopenacooling systempressurecapwhentheradiatorishot.

CoolantChecks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

CoolingSystem-Drain,Flush,andRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

SelectionOfCoolant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

- Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedHOATenginecoolant(antifreeze),may resultinenginedamageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection.Ifanon-HOATenginecoolant (antifreeze)isintroducedintothecoolingsystem inanemergency,itshouldbereplacedwiththe specifiedenginecoolant(antifreeze)assoonas possible.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditionalrustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,asthey maynotbecompatiblewiththeenginecoolant (antifreeze)andmayplugtheradiator.
• Thisvehiclehasnotbeendesignedforusewith PropyleneGlycolbasedenginecoolant(anti-freeze).UseofPropyleneGlycolbasedengine coolant(antifreeze)isnotrecommended.

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before

replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34^ ( -37^ ) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent coolant changes.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words "DONOTOPENHOT" on the cooling system pressure cap areas safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Donot loosenor removal he capt ooolan over heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. Top prevent scalding or injury, donot remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorenginedamagemayresult.

DisposalofUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CoolantLevel

4 Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the "ADD" and "FULL" lines, shown on the bottle.

6CylinderEngines—the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the "COLD" and "FULL" range on the bottle when the engine is cold.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components.

374MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

BrakeSystem

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyanaccident.Drivingwithyourfootresting orridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

MasterCylinder-BrakeFluidLevelCheck

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.

Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir to secure data all times. Brake fluid a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a accident.
  • Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire.Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces,careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminatethebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscould bedamaged,causingpartialorcompletebrake failure.Thiscouldresultinanaccident.

AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing.

The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid.

(Continued)

FluidLevelCheck-2.4Land2.7LEngines

Use the following procedure to check the automatic transmission fluid level properly:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180^ F ( 82^ C), which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is

driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80^ F ( 27^ C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then, remove dipstick and note the reading.

a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked "HOT" (between the upper two holes in the dipstick).

b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked "COLD."

If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill.

CAUTION!

• Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanu-facturer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterio-rationintransmissionshiftqualityand/ortorque convertershudder.Usingatransmissionfluid otherthanthatrecommendedbythemanufacturer willresultinmorefrequentfluidandfilter changes.Referto"Fluids,Lubricants,andGenuineParts"in"MaintainingYourVehicle"forfur-therinformation.
• Dirtandwaterinthetransmissioncancause seriousdamage.Topreventdirtandwaterfrom enteringthetransmissionaftercheckingorreplenishingfluid,makecertainthatthedipstickcapsis re-seatedproperly.

FluidLevelCheck-3.5LEngine

The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only.

TransmissionFluidandFilterChanges

Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

SpecialAdditives

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

AppearanceCareandProtectionfromCorrosion

ProtectionofBodyandPaintfromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE379

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
- Insects, tree sap, and tar.
- Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

380MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowder,whichwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi (8274kPa)canresultindamageorremovalof paintanddecals.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR®Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelandWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR® or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels' protective finish.

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure-If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR®Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

InstrumentPanelCover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products, which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.

CleaningInteriorTrim

Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR®Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent

if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

CleaningLeatherUpholstery

MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR®Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

384MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

Dry with a soft tissue.

CleaningCenterConsoleCupholders

Removal

Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward.

Cleaning

Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.

Installation

Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.

ConvertibleTopCare

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mild dew on the top material:

• Avoidhigh-pressurecarwashes, astheycandamagethetopmaterial. Also, increasedwaterpressuremayforcepasttheweatherstrips.
• Removeanystandingwaterfromthetopanddry thesurfacebeforeopeningit.Operatingthetop, openingadoorloweringawindowwhilethe topiswetmayallowwatertodripintothe vehiclesinterior.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Usecarewhenwashingthevehicle,waterpressure directedattheweatherstripsealsmaycausewater toleakintothevehiclesinterior.

Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment.

(Continued)

386MAINTAININGYOUR VEHICLE

Washing

Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred.

CAUTION!

Avoidhigh-pressurecarwashes, astheycandamage thetopmaterial. Also, increased waterpressure may forcewaterpasttheweatherstrips.

GeneralCleaning

Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent.

CAUTION!

Neveruseanabrasivetypecleanerorbleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organicsolvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the topist thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area.

Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top's drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local dealership for further suggestions.

AdditionalCleaningProcedure

For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains, apply MOPAR® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm water. Let the top dry before lowering it.

Protection

For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your cloth top periodically. A fabric protectant such as Scotch-guard® is suggested. The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant.

CAUTION!

AvoidgettingScotchguard® onthesurrounding weatherstrips,moldings,paint,orglass.Damageto theseitemsmightoccur.

WeatherStripCare—SoftandHardTop

Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodically with MOPAR®Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent to keep them soft and pliable.

388MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

FUSES

TotallyIntegratedPowerModule(TIPM)

The TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location.

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with visible internal components and a black arrow pointing to a specific component (no text or symbols present)

TotallyIntegratedPowerModule(TIPM)

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE389

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
1	40 Amp Green	—	Power Top Module – If Equipped
2	—	20 Amp Yellow	AWD Module
3	—	10 Amp Red	Battery Feed – Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/ Brake Switch
4	—	10 Amp Red	Battery Feed – Ignition Switch
5	—	20 Amp Yellow	Trailer Tow – If Equipped
6	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Power Mirror Switch/ Climate Controls

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
7	—	30 Amp Green	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 1
8	—	30 Amp Green	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 2
9	40 Amp Green		Battery Feed – Power Seats – If Equipped/PZEV Air Pump – If Equipped
10	—	20 Amp Yellow	Battery Feed – Cabin Compartment Node (CCN)
11	—	15 Amp Lt Blue	Selectable Power Outlet
12	—	20 Amp Yellow	—

390MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
13	—	20 Amp Yellow	—
14	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Cabin Compartment Node (CCN)/Interior Lighting
15	40 Amp Green	—	Battery Feed – Radiator Fan Relay
16	—	15 Amp Lt. Blue	IGN Run/ACC – Cigar Lighter/PWR Sunroof Mod

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
17	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Wireless Control Module (WCM)/Clock/ Steering Control Module (SCM)
18	40 Amp Green	—	Battery Feed – Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay
19	—	20 Amp Yellow	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Power A m p F e e d 2 – I Equipped
20	—	15 Amp Lt. Blue	Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Radio
21	—	10 Amp Red	—

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE391

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
22	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Run – Climate Controls/ Hot Cupholder – If Equipped
23	—	15 Amp Lt. Blue	Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay Feed 3
24	—	25 Amp Natural	Battery Feed — PWR Sunroof Feed
25	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Run — Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
26	—	15 Amp Lt. Blue	Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay Feed 2

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
27	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Run – Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
28	—	10 Amp Red	Ignition Run — Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
29 — —			Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
30	—	20 Amp Yellow	Ignition Run – Heated Seats – If Equipped

392MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
31	—	10 Amp Red	—
32	30 Amp Pink	—	Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay Feed 1
33	—	10 Amp Red	Battery Feed – Switch Bank/ Diagnostic Link Connector/ Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
34	30 Amp Pink	—	Battery Feed – Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If Equipped/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module – If Equipped
35	40 Amp Green	—	Battery Feed – Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If Equipped/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module – If Equipped
36	30 Amp Pink	—	Battery Feed – Passenger Door Module (PDM)/Driver Door Module (DDM)
37	—	25 Amp Natural	Power Top Module – If Equipped

CAUTION!

- WheninstallingtheTotallyIntegratedPower Modulecover,itisimportanttoensurethecoveris properlypositionedandfullylatched.Failureto dosomayallowwatertogetintotheTotally IntegratedPowerModule,andpossiblyresultin anelectricalsystemfailure.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

Whenreplacingablownfuse,itisimportantto useonlyafusehavingthecorrectamperagerating. Theuseofafusewitharatingotherthanindicated mayresultinadangerouselectricalsystemoverload.Ifaproperlyratedfusecontinuestoblow,it indicatesaprobleminthecircuitthatmustbe corrected.

VEHICLESTORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.

• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

REPLACEMENTBULBS

All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

LIGHTBULBS-InteriorBulbNumber

Front Courtesy/Reading Lamps ..LED(DealerService)

Center Console Courtesy Lamp ..... 578/W5W

Glove Box Lamp 194

Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 9

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.

LIGHTBULBS-ExteriorBulbNo.

Low Beam Headlamp. 9006

High Beam Headlamp 9005

Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp ...3457AK

Front Fog Lamp....P S X 2 4 W

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp

(CHMSL) W16W(921)

Rear Tail/Stop Lamp 3057

Rear Turn Signal Lamp. 3057

Backup Lamp 3157

License Lamp 168 or W 5 W

BULBREPLACEMENT

Headlamp

1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector behind the headlamp.

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver's side of the vehicle.

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE395

1. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the lamp assembly and grasp the connector.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two white arrows pointing to features, no visible text or symbols.

1. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull outward from assembly.

Close-up of hands operating a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.

396MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

1. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.

Hand holding a mechanical component next to a circular tire (no text or symbols visible)

1. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

2. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.

FrontTurnSignal/ParkingLamp

1. Raise and prop open the hood.

2. Rotate the bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp housing.

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

81b71ee8

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE397

1. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.
2. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

FrontFogLamp

NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield.

1. Rotate the bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing.

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel assembly (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.

398MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

1. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Tail/Stop, RearTurnSignalandBackupLamps

The taillamps are a two piece design. The turn signal, brake and taillamps are located in the rear corner body panel housing. The backup and taillamps are located in the trunk lid housing.

Close-up of a car's headlight with no visible text or symbols

ChangingtheTail/StopLamporRearTurnSignal Lamp

1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the taillamp

Close-up of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp housing.

Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with two black arrows pointing to the components (no text or symbols visible)

1. Grasp the taillamp housing and pull it firmly outward while pushing gently on the studs from inside to disengage the housing from the vehicle.

400MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

1. Rotate the applicable bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillamp housing.

1 — Tail/Stop Lamp 2 — Turn Signal Lamp

1. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.

2. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

3. Reinstall the taillamp housing.

ChangingtheBackupLamp

1. Open the trunk.

2. Rotate the bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.

Medical implant device with arrow indicating a specific anatomical feature (no text or symbols present)

81b7273b

1 — Rear Fog Lamp 2 — Backup Lamp

1. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.
2. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

LicensePlateLamp

1. Remove two retaining screws holding the lamp lens in place.

Side view of a car's front bumper with an inset close-up showing a small display (no text or symbols visible)

819ba516

1. Gently pry the lens loose.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the lamp lens with the two retaining screws.

1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Rotate the bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the CHMSL housing.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with arrows indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.
2. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the CHMSL housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

FLUIDCAPACITIES

U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)
All Engines 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters
EngineOilwithFilter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.4 Liters
2.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.5L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
CoolingSystem*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR®Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	7.7 Quarts 7.3 Liters
2.7L Engine (MOPAR®Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters
3.5L Engine (MOPAR®Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, ANDGENUINEPARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant	MOPAR®Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 2.4L and 2.7L Engines	Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine	Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR®Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except PZEV* ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.11 mm])
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine with PZEV* ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs – 2.7L Engine TE10PMC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection – 2.4L and 2.7L Engines 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.5L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission	MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4® product.
Brake Master Cylinder	MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir	MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4® product.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■Emissions Control System Maintenance ..... 4 0 8

□Required Maintenance Intervals....410

■Maintenance Schedule 408

408 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

EMISSIONSCONTROLSYSTEMMAINTENANCE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in boldtype must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULE

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES409

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in

"Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or under "Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

AtEachStopforFuel

• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

410MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

OnceaMonth

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

AtEachOilChange

• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failuretoperformtherequiredmaintenanceitems mayresultindamagetothevehicle.

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

6,000Miles(10,000km)or 6MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000Miles(20,000km)or12MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

☐InspecttheCVjoints.Performthefirstinspectionat12,000miles(20000km)or12months.

□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.Performthefirstinspectionat12,000miles(20000km)or 12months.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

412MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

18,000Miles(30,000km)or 18MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

24,000Miles(40,000km)or24MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

30,000Miles(50,000km)or 30MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.
□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
☐Replacethesparkplugs(2.4LEngine exceptPZEV*).
□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfourwheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

36,000Miles(60,000km)or36MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

414MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

42,000Miles(70,000km)or 42MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

48,000Miles(80,000km)or48MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

54,000Miles(90,000km)or 54MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

60,000Miles(100,000km)or60MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

☐Replacethsparkplugs(2.4LEngineexceptPZEV*).

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

☐Changetheautomatictransmissionfluid&filterifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:police,taxi,fleet,orfrequenttrailertowing.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfourwheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

416MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

66,000Miles(110,000km)or 66MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

72,000Miles(120,000km)or72MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

78,000Miles(130,000km)or 78MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

84,000Miles(140,000km)or84MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

418MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

90,000Miles(150,000km)or 90MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.
□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
☐Replacethesparkplugs(2.4LEngine exceptPZEV*).
□InspectandreplacethePCVvalve,if necessary†.
☐Adjustparkingbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfourwheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

96,000Miles(160,000km)or96MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

102,000Miles(170,000km)or 102MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.
☐Replacethsparkplugs(2.4LPZEV*, 2.7Land3.5LEngines).
☐Replacethetimingbelt(3.5LEngine).
☐Flushandreplacetheenginecoolant.
□Inspectaccessorydrivebelt,replaceif necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

108,000Miles(180,000km)or108MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

420MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

114,000Miles(190,000km)or 114MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

120,000Miles(200,000km)or120MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

☐Replacethsparkplugs(2.4LEngineexceptPZEV*).

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

□Changetheautomatictransmissionfluid&filter.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfourwheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

126,000Miles(210,000km)or 126MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

132,000Miles(220,000km)or132MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

422MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

138,000Miles(230,000km)or 138MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

144,000Miles(240,000km)or144MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings, andreplaceasnecessary.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter(ifequipped).

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspecttheexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES423

150,000Miles(250,000km)or 150MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.
☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
☐Replacethesparkplugs(2.4LEngine exceptPZEV*).
☐Adjustparkingbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfourwheeldiscbrakes.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle

† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperform aservicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetent mechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyour vehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunction andeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident

IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle 427

□Prepare For The Appointment....427

□Prepare A List.... 4 2 7

□Be Reasonable With Requests....427

■If You Need Assistance....427

□Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 4 2 8

□ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 428

□ In Mexico Contact 428

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....429

□ServiceContract 429

■Warranty Information.... 4 3 0

■ MOPAR® Parts 430

■ Reporting Safety Defects 430

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. 43

□In Canada 431

426IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

■Publication Order Forms 431

□Traction Grades 433

■Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades.... 4 3 3

□Temperature Grades....434

□Treadwear.... 433

SUGGESTIONSFOROBTAININGSERVICEFOR YOURVEHICLE

PrepareForTheAppointment

If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

PrepareAList

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

BeReasonableWithRequests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IFYOUNEEDASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

428IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
  • Authorized dealership name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

ChryslerGroupLLCCustomerCenter

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

ChryslerCanadInc.CustomerCenter

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone]

InMexicocontact:

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

CustomerAssistanceForTheHearingOrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

ServiceContract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-485-2001).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

430IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain product of component wear contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTYINFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR®PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTINGSAFETYDEFECTS

Inthe50UnitedStatesandWashington,D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE431

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

InCanada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to: Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.

PUBLICATIONORDERFORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

• ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the

432IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

- Owner'sManuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Calltollfreeat:

• 1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

VisitusontheWorldwideWebat:

- www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENTOFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITYGRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TractionGrades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

434IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

TemperatureGrades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

436INDEX

About Your Brakes 264 Airbag Maintenance 63

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) 2 6 7 Airbag, Side 55,58,60

Accessory Delay, Power....1 2 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain)....5 8

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)....370 Alarm, Panic....25

Adding Fuel 314 Alarm System (Security Alarm) 18,166

Adding Washer Fluid 366 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle 7

Additives, Fuel 307 Antenna, Satellite Radio 224

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ... 360 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..... 370,403

Air Conditioner Maintenance 362 Disposal 372

Air Conditioning....230 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....267

Air Conditioning Controls....2 3 0 Anti-Lock Warning Light....2 6 7

Air Conditioning Filter 241,363 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 18

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips 242 Appearance Care 379

Air Conditioning Refrigerant 362,363 Ashtray 147

Air Conditioning System 230,235,362 Auto Down Power Windows 3 3

Air Pressure, Tires 287 Auto Unlock, Doors 31

Airbag 52 Automatic Dimming Mirror 109

Airbag Deployment 61 Automatic Door Locks 31

Airbag Light 59,64,79,159 Automatic Headlights 1 2 4

INDEX437

Automatic Oil Change Indicator ..... 164,174,408

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..... 2 3 5

Automatic Transaxle 247,250,376

Adding Fluid 377,378,405

Filter 378

Fluid and Filter Changes 378

Fluid Level Check 377,378

Interlock System 252,253

Reset Mode 257

Selection Of Lubricant ..... 4 0 5

Shifting 250

Special Additives 378

Autostick 258

Back-Up Lights 398

Battery 360

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 6

Location 36

Belts, Seat 39,79

Body Mechanism Lubrication 364

B-Pillar Location 282

Brake Assist System 270

Brake, Parking 264

Brake System....374

Anti-Lock (ABS) 267

Fluid Check 374,405

Master Cylinder 374

Parking 264

Warning Light 160

Brakes 374

Brake/Transaxle Interlock 252

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..... 7 7

Bulb Replacement 394

Bulbs, Light 81,394

Calibration, Compass 177

Capacities, Fluid 403

Caps, Filler

Fuel 314

Oil (Engine) 349,350,351,358

Power Steering 264

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) 371

Car Washes 380

Carbon Monoxide Warning....78,309

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) 316

Cellular Phone 1 12,230

Center High Mounted Stop Light ..... 4 0 2

Certification Label 316

Chains, Tire 294

Changing A Flat Tire 332

Chart, Tire Sizing 27

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light) 353

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 78

Checks, Safety 78

Child Restraint 66,68,72,74

Child Restraint Tether Anchors 70,72

Cigar Lighter....147

Clean Air Gasoline....305

Cleaning Wheels 381

Windshield Wiper Blades 365

Climate Control 230

Clock 182,184,198,200,203,213

Coin Holder 149

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance 2 2 9

Compact Spare Tire 289

Compass....176

Compass Calibration 177

Compass Variance 178

Computer, Trip/Travel 175

Console, Floor 149

Contract, Service 429

Convertible....87

Convertible Top 87

INDEX439

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..... 3 7 1

Cooling System 369

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....370

Coolant Capacity 403

Coolant Level....369,372

Disposal of Used Coolant 372

Drain, Flush, and Refill 369

Inspection 372

Points to Remember 373

Pressure Cap 371

Radiator Cap 371

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 370,403,404

Corrosion Protection....379

Cruise Control (Speed Control)....135

Cruise Light....165

Cupholders 148,384

Customer Assistance 427

Customer Programmable Features 179

Daytime Running Lights 127

Dealer Service 354

Deck Lid, Emergency Release 37

Deck Lid, Power Release 35

Defroster, Rear Window ..... 1 5 1

Defroster, Windshield ..... 80,232,233,238

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers 131

Diagnostic System, Onboard 352

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 128

Dipsticks

Automatic Transaxle 377,378

Oil (Engine) 356

Power Steering 264

Disabled Vehicle Towing 344

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 372

Engine Oil 359

Door Locks 29

Door Locks, Automatic....3 1

440INDEX

Door Opener, Garage 138

Driver's Seat Back Tilt....1 1 7

Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..... 2 6 0

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water 261

E-85 Fuel 310

Electric Rear Window Defrost 151

Electric Remote Mirrors....1 1 0

Electrical Power Outlets 144

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 1 3 5

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..... 2 7 3

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 1 7 2

Emergency Deck Lid Release....37

Emergency, In Case of

Jacking....3 3 2

Jump Starting 339

Overheating 330

Towing 344

Emergency Trunk Release 37

Emission Control System Maintenance ..... 353,408

Engine 349,350,351

Air Cleaner 360

Block Heater 250

Break-In Recommendations 77

Checking Oil Level 356

Coolant (Antifreeze)....369,404

Cooling 369

Exhaust Gas Caution 78,309

Fails to Start 248

Flooded, Starting ..... 2 4 8

Fuel Requirements 304,403

Jump Starting 339

O i l 356,403,404

Oil Change Interval 164,174,357,408

Oil Filler Cap 349,350,351,358

Oil Filter 359

INDEX441

Oil Filter Disposal 359

Oil Selection 357,403

Oil Synthetic 359

Overheating....3 3 0

Starting 247

Temperature Gauge....158

Engine Oil Viscosity 358

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . 6 1

Entry System, Illuminated 20

Ethanol 305

Exhaust Gas Caution 78,309

Exhaust System....78,366

Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1

Exterior Lights 81

Fabric Care 382

Filler Location Fuel 158,314

Filters

Air Cleaner 360

Air Conditioning....241,363

Automatic Transaxle 378

Engine Oil 359,404

Engine Oil Disposal 359

Flashers 330

Hazard Warning 330

Turn Signal 81,128

Flash-To-Pass 128

Flat Tire Changing 332

Flat Tire Stowage 338

Flexible Fuel Vehicles 310

Cruising Range....3 1 3

Engine Oil 312

Fuel Requirements 310,311

Maintenance 310,313

Replacement Parts 313

Starting 313

Flooded Engine Starting 248

Floor Console 149

442INDEX

Fluid Capacities 403

Fluid Leaks 82

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,378

Brake 374,405

Cooling System 369

Engine Oil 356

Power Steering 264,405

Fluids 404

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..... 4 0 4

Fog Light Service 39

Fog Lights....123,127,166,397

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle....342

Fuel 304

Adding....314

Additives 30

Clean Air 305

Ethanol 305

Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....158,314

Filler Door (Gas Cap) 158

Gasoline 304

Gauge....158

Light 159

Materials Added 307

Methanol 305

Octane Rating 304,404

Requirements 304,403

Tank Capacity 403

Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . SeeFlexibleFuelVehicles

Fuel System Caution 315

Fueling 314

Fuses 388

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) 138

'Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 314,316,352

Gasoline, Clean Air 305

Gasoline (Fuel) 304

Gasoline, Reformulated 305

INDEX443

Gauges

Coolant Temperature....158

Fuel....158

Odometer 162

Tachometer....162

Gear Ranges 254

Gearshift 254

General Information....17,27,259,304

General Maintenance....355

Glass Cleaning 383

Gross Axle Weight Rating 317,319

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating....316,318

GVWR....316

Hands-Free Phone (UconnectTM)....1 1 2

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water 26

Hazard Warning Flasher....3 3 0

Head Restraints 118

Headlights....123,124,394

Automatic....124

Bulb Replacement 394

Cleaning 381

Delay 125

High Beam....171

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..... 1 2 8

Lights On Reminder 124

On With Wipers 125,133

Passing....128

Replacing 394

Switch....123,124

Time Delay 125

Heated Mirrors....1 1 1

Heated Seats 1 1 4

Heater 230

Heater, Engine Block 250

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .. 128

Hitches

Trailer Towing 319

Holder, Cup 148

HomeLink®(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 138

Hood Prop....122

Hood Release....1 2 1

Ignition 12

K e y 1

Lock 12

Ignition Key Removal 12

Illuminated Entry 20

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) 1 4

Infant Restraint....66,67,68

Information Center, Vehicle 172

Instrument Cluster ..... 157,158

Instrument Panel and Controls....156

Instrument Panel Cover 382

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 384

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 388

Interior Appearance Care 382

Interior Lighting....123,129

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) 131

Introduction 4

Jack Location 3 3 3

Jack Operation 332,334

Jacking Instructions 3 3 4

Jump Starting 339

Key, Programming....16

Key, Replacement....16

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 14

Key-In Reminder 14

Keyless Entry System 21

Keys 12

Knee Bolster 52

INDEX445

Lane Change and Turn Signals ..... 128,166

Lane Change Assist....128

Lap/Shoulder Belts 39

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHILDREN)....70,72

Latch Plate....4 1

Latches 82

Hood 121

Lead Free Gasoline....304

Leaks, Fluid 82

Life of Tires 292

Light Bulbs....81,394

Lights 81,123

Airbag 59,64,79,159

Automatic Headlights 124

Back-Up 398

Battery Saver....129

Brake Warning 160

Bulb Replacement....394

Center Mounted Stop 402

Courtesy/Reading 129

Daytime Running....127

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..... 123,128

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 274

Engine Temperature Warning 160

Exterior 81

Fog 127,166,397

Headlight Switch 123,124

Headlights....124

Headlights On Reminder 124

Headlights On With Wipers 125,133

High Beam 128

High Beam Indicator 171

High Beam/Low Beam Select 128

Illuminated Entry 20

Instrument Cluster 123

Interior 129

License 401

Lights On Reminder....1 2 4

Low Fuel....159

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..... 1 7 0

Map Reading 129

Oil Pressure 160

Park....123,124

Passing....128

Rear Tail 398

Seat Belt Reminder 159

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)....18

Service 394

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm)....166

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..... 168,295

Traction Control 274

Turn Signal.... 81,123,128,166,396,398

Voltage 15

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 1 5 8

Loading Vehicle 316,317

Capacities 317

Tires 282

Locks 29

Auto Unlock....3 1

Automatic Door 31

Door 29

Power Door 30

Low Tire Pressure System 295

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH)....70,72

Lubrication, Body 364

Lumbar Support 116

Maintenance Free Battery 360

Maintenance, General 355

Maintenance Procedures 355

Maintenance Schedule 408

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 170,353

Manual, Service 431

Map/Reading Lights 129

INDEX447

Master Cylinder (Brakes) 374

Memory Feature (Memory Seat)....1 1 7

Methanol 305

Mini-Trip Computer 175

Mirrors....109

Automatic Dimming....109

Electric Powered....1 1 0

Electric Remote 110

Heated....1 1 1

Outside....1 1 0

Vanity 1 1 2

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9 5

Mopar Parts 354,430

MTBE/ETBE 305

Multi-Function Control Lever 123

New Vehicle Break-In Period 77

Occupant Restraints 37,58,61

Occupant Restraints (Sedan) 55,58

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) 304

Odometer 162

Tr i p 162,165

Oil Change Indicator....164,174,408

Oil Change Indicator, Reset 164,174

Oil, Engine 356,404

Capacity 403

Change Interval ..... 164,174,357,408

Checking 356

Dipstick 356

Disposal 359

Filter 359,404

Filter Disposal 359

Identification Logo 357

Materials Added to 359

Recommendation.... 357,403

Synthetic 359

INDEX

Viscosity 358,403
Oil Filter, Change 359
Oil Filter, Selection 359
Oil Pressure Light....160
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352,353
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) 13
Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ..... 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors....1 1 0
Overdrive 255
Overheating, Engine 330
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 4,431
Phone, Cellular 1 1 2
Phone, Hands-Free (UconnectTM)....1 1 2
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..... 2 8 2
Power
Accessory Delay....1 2
Deck Lid Release 3 5
Door Locks 30
Mirrors 110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..... 1 4 4
Seats 1 1 3
Steering 263,264
Windows....32
Paint Care 379 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 51
Panic Alarm 25 Preparation for Jacking 332
Parking Brake 264
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 1 1 7
Passing Light 128
Personal Settings....179
Pets 76 (Remote Keyless Entry) 21

INDEX449

Radial Ply Tires 289

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..... 3 7 1

Radio Operation 230

Radio Remote Controls 2 2 8

Radio, Satellite (Uconnect®studios) ..... 2 2 3

Rear Cupholder....148

Rear Window Defroster....151

Rear Window Features....151

Recreational Towing 328

Reformulated Gasoline 305

Refrigerant....363

Release, Hood .... 1 2 1

Reminder, Lights On....1 2 4

Reminder, Seat Belt 50

Remote Control

Security Alarm....18

Starting System 27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 2 1

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ..... 2 2 8

Remote Starting System 27

Remote Trunk Release 35

Replacement Bulbs 394

Replacement Keys....16

Replacement Parts 354

Replacement Tires 292

Reporting Safety Defects 430

Resetting Oil Change Indicator ..... 164,174

Restraint, Head 11 8

Restraints, Child 6 6

Restraints, Occupant....37

Reverse Lights 398

Rotation, Tires 294

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 79

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 81

Safety Defects, Reporting 430

Safety, Exhaust Gas 78

Safety Information, Tire 277

450INDEX

Safety Tips 78

Satellite Radio Antenna 2 2 4

Satellite Radio (Uconnect®studios) ..... 2 2 3

Schedule, Maintenance....408

Seat Belt Maintenance 384

Seat Belt Reminder 50

Seat Belts 37,39,79

And Pregnant Women 51

Child Restraint....66,67,68,74

Extender 51

Front Seat 39,40

Inspection 79

Operating Instructions 40

Pretensioners....45

Rear Seat 39

Reminder 159

Untwisting Procedure....4 4

Seats 113

Easy Entry 11 7

Heated....11 4

Height Adjustment....11 3

Lumbar Support....11 6

Memory 117

Power 113

Reclining....11 6

Seatback Release 117

Tilting 113

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 18

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 370,404

Selection of Oil 357

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 14

Sentry Key Programming....16

Service Assistance 427

Service Contract 429

Service Manuals 431

Setting the Clock....182,184,198,200,203,213

Settings, Personal 179

INDEX451

Shifting Automatic Transaxle....250

Shoulder Belts 39

Side Airbag 60

Side View Mirror Adjustment....1 1 0

Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..... 2 4 1

Signals, Turn 81,128,398

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On 260

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) 294

Snow Tires 294

Spare Tire 289,333

Specifications O i l 3 5

Speed Control (Cruise Control)....135,165

Speedometer....158

Starting 27,247

Engine Fails to Start 248

Remote 27

Starting and Operating 247

Starting Procedures....247

Steering Column Lock....1 3 4 Power....263,264 Tilt Column....1 3 4 Wheel, Tilt....1 3 4

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 228

Storage....149,393 Storage, Vehicle....2 4 0

Stuck, Freeing 342

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag 52 Synthetic Engine Oil 359

System, Remote Starting 27

Tachometer 162

Taillights 398

Telescoping Steering Column 134

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..... 2 3 5

452INDEX

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..... 158,330

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ..... 7 0

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm)....18

Theft System (Security Alarm)....18

Tilt Steering Column 134

Time Delay, Headlight 125

Tire and Loading Information Placard ..... 2 8 2

Tire Identification Number (TIN) 280

Tire Markings 277

Tire Safety Information 277

Tires 81,286,433

Aging (Life of Tires)....292

Air Pressure 286

Chains 294

Changing 332

Compact Spare 289

Flat Changing....332,338

General Information 286

High Speed 289

Inflation Pressures 287

Jacking 332

Life of Tires 292

Load Capacity 282,283

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) 295

Pressure Warning Light 168

Quality Grading 433

Radial 289

Replacement 292

Rotation 294

Safety 277,286

Sizes 278

Snow Tires 294

Spare Tire 3 3 3

Spinning 290

Tread Wear Indicators 291

To Open Hood 121

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight....3 2 2

Tonneau Cover 87

INDEX 453

Towing 318

Disabled Vehicle....344

Guide....321

Recreational 328

Weight....321

Traction 260

Trailer Towing 31

Cooling System Tips 328

Hitches....319

Minimum Requirements....3 2 3

Trailer and Tongue Weight....3 2 2

Trailer Towing Guide....3 2 1

Trailer Weight....3 2 1

Transaxle

Additives....378

Automatic....247,250,376

Autostick....258

Filter 378

Maintenance....376

Operation 250

Overdrive 255

Selection of Lubricant 405

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Transaxle

Transmitter Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry) 26

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener

(HomeLink®) 138

Transmitter Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry) 21

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..... 2 1

Transporting Pets 76

Tread Wear Indicators 291

Trip Odometer 162

Trip Odometer Reset Button 165

Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) 35,37

Trunk Release, Emergency 37

Trunk Release Remote Control 35

Turn Signals.... 123,128,166,398

Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..... 1 1 2

Understanding Your Instrument Panel ..... 1 5 6

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..... 4 3 3

Universal Transmitter ..... 1 3 8

Unleaded Gasoline 304

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt 4 4

Upholstery Care 382

Vanity Mirrors....1 1 2

Variance, Compass 178

Vehicle Certification Label 316

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6

Vehicle Loading....283,316,317

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations 7

Vehicle Storage 240,393

Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..... 1 8

Viscosity, Engine Oil 35

Voice Recognition System (VR)....1 1 2

Warning Lights

(Instrument Cluster Description) 158

Warnings and Cautions 6

Warranty Information 430

Washer, Adding Fluid 366

Washers, Windshield ..... 130,133,366

Washing Vehicle....380

Water

Driving Through 261

Wheel and Wheel Trim 381

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 381

Wind Buffeting 35

Window Fogging 241

Windows 32

Power 32

Windshield Defroster....80,232,233,238

8Windshield Washers....130,133

Fluid 366

INDEX455

Windshield Wiper Blades 365 Wiper Blade Replacement 365
Windshield Wipers....130 Wiper, Delay....131
Windstop....97 Wipers, Intermittent....131
Folding 97

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

Chrysler Group

10C27-126-AC

3rd Edition

Printed in U.S.A.